Xerox Copier 701P47169 User Manual

Version 6.0, Sept. 2007  
701P47169  
®
FreeFlow  
OpPerroacetsosrMaannadger  
Administrator  
Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
iv  
Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Limitations when creating JDF Tickets in  
Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Setting the number of concurrent processes and the copy count  
vi  
Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Adding a recipient to a Notify step with no recipient  
Accessing Workflow Submission Client from  
Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
viii  
Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices and Certifications  
Approvals and certification  
For the UK, this product is serviced under a BS5750 Quality  
system accepted by the British Standards Institution.  
60HZ, 115V  
The equipment is listed by the Underwriters Laboratories,  
UL1950, certified by Canadian Standards Association, CSA22.2,  
No. 1950.  
50HZ, 220V-240V  
The equipment is certified by the British Standards Institution,  
IEC950 (EN60950). The equipment is manufactured under a  
BS5750 Quality system accepted by the British Standards  
Institution. The equipment is also certified in compliance with  
applicable standards by various national bodies.  
Radio Frequency Emissions  
USA  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency  
energy. It may cause radio interference to radio communications if  
not installed according to the installation instructions. The  
equipment complies with the limits for a Class A computing device  
as documented in Subpart J, Part 15 of the FCC rules which are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against such  
interference when operated in a commercial environment.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause  
interference. In such cases, the user is responsible for the  
expense of correcting the interference.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Canada  
The equipment does not exceed the class A limits for radio noise  
emissions from a digital apparatus as documented in the radio  
interference regulations of the Canadian Department of  
Communications.  
Cet appareil numÈrique est conforme aux limites d'Èmission de  
bruits radioÈlectriques pour les appareils de classe A stipulÈes  
dans le RÈglement sur le brouillage radioÈlectriques du ministÈre  
des Communications du Canada.  
Europe 50HZ, 220V-240V Equipment  
The equipment was tested and is certified in conformance with the  
European commission directive 82/499/ECC and VDE 0871/  
0875, class B which relates to radio frequency interference. This  
equipment is certified, manufactured and tested in compliance  
with strict safety and radio frequency interference regulations.  
Safety  
Your Xerox equipment and supplies were designed and tested to  
meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency  
examination, approval and compliance with established  
environmental standards.  
Attention to the following notes ensures the continued safe  
operation of your equipment.  
If you need any additional safety information concerning the  
equipment or materials, contact your local representative.  
Ozone Safety  
This product will produce ozone during normal operation. The  
ozone produced is heavier than air and is dependent on copy  
volume. Providing the correct environmental parameters as  
specified in the Xerox installation procedures will ensure that the  
concentration levels meet safe limits.  
If you need additional information about ozone, please request the  
Xerox publication Ozone (part number 600E74140) by calling 1-  
800-828-6571 in the United States and Canada.  
x
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Electrical Safety  
Always follow a code of safe habits as described in the following  
statements:  
1. Use only the power cable supplied with this equipment.  
2. Plug the power cable directly into a properly grounded  
electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord. If you are not  
sure whether or not an outlet is properly grounded, consult a  
qualified electrician.  
3. Do not use a ground adapter plug to connect this equipment to  
an electrical outlet that lacks a ground connection terminal.  
WARNING: Improper connection of the equipment grounding  
conductor can result in severe electrical shock.  
4. Do not place this equipment where people might step or trip on  
the power cable.  
5. Do not place objects on the power cable.  
6. Do not override or disable electrical or mechanical interlock  
devices. Covers, guards, and interlock switches are provided  
to prevent operator access to unsafe areas.  
7. Do not obstruct ventilation openings. These openings are  
provided to prevent overheating of the machine.  
WARNING: Never push objects of any kind into slots and  
openings on this equipment. Contacting a voltage point or shorting  
out a part could result in electrical shock or fire  
8. If any of the following conditions occur, turn off the machine  
immediately and disconnect the power cable from the  
electrical outlet. Contact an authorized Xerox Service  
Representative to correct the problem:  
The equipment emits unusual odors or makes unusual noises.  
The power cable is damaged or frayed.  
A wall panel circuit breaker, fuse, or other safety device has  
been tripped.  
Liquid is spilled into the machine.  
The machine is exposed to water.  
Any part of the machine is damaged.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operational Safety  
Your Xerox equipment and supplies have been designed and  
tested to meet strict safety requirements. These include safety  
agency examination, approval, and compliance with established  
environmental standards.  
To ensure the continued safe operation of your Xerox equipment,  
follow these safety guidelines at all times:  
Do These  
Always connect equipment to a correctly grounded power  
outlet. If in doubt, have the outlet checked by a qualified  
electrician.  
Always follow all warnings and instructions that are marked  
on or supplied with the equipment.  
Always exercise care when moving or relocating equipment.  
Please contact your local Xerox Service Department to  
arrange relocation of the copier to a location outside of your  
building.  
Always locate the machine on a solid support surface (not on  
plush carpet) that has adequate strength to support the weight  
of the machine.  
Always locate the machine in an area that has adequate  
ventilation and room for servicing.  
Always use materials and supplies specifically designed for  
your Xerox equipment. Use of unsuitable materials may result  
in poor performance and possibly a hazardous situation.  
Always unplug this equipment from the electrical outlet before  
cleaning.  
Do Not Do These  
Never use a ground adapter plug to connect the equipment to  
a power outlet that lacks a ground connection terminal.  
Never attempt any maintenance function that is not  
specifically described in this documentation.  
xii  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Never obstruct ventilation openings. They are provided to  
prevent overheating.  
Never remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws.  
There are no operator serviceable areas within these covers.  
Never locate the machine near a radiator or any other heat  
source.  
Never push objects of any kind into the ventilation openings.  
Never override or "cheat" any of the electrical or mechanical  
interlock devices.  
Never operate the equipment if you notice unusual noises or  
odors. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and  
contact your Xerox Service Representative immediately.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Illegal Usage in USA  
Congress, by statute, has forbidden the copying of the following  
subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of fines or  
imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such  
copies.  
1. Obligations or Securities of the United States Government,  
such as:  
Certificates of indebtedness  
United States Bonds  
National Bank Currency  
Treasury Notes  
Coupons from bonds  
Federal Reserve Notes  
Federal Reserve Bank Notes  
Fractional Notes  
Silver Certificates  
Certificates of Deposit  
Gold Certificates  
Paper Money  
Bonds and obligations of certain agencies of the government,  
such as FHA, etc.  
Bonds  
NOTE: U.S. Savings Bonds may be photographed only for  
publicity purposes in connection with the campaign for the sale of  
such bonds.  
Internal Revenue Stamps  
NOTE: If necessary to copy a legal document on which there is a  
canceled revenue stamp, this may be done, provided the  
reproduction of the document is performed for lawful purposes.  
xiv  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Postage Stamps, canceled or not canceled  
NOTE: For philatelic purposes, Postage Stamps may be  
photographed, provided the reproduction is in black and white,  
and is less than 3/4 or more than 1-1/2 times the linear  
dimensions of the original.  
Postal Money Orders  
Bills, Checks, or Drafts for Money, drawn by or upon  
authorized officers of the United States  
Stamps and other representatives of value, of whatever  
denomination, which have been or may be issued under any  
Act of Congress  
2. Adjusted Compensation Certificates for Veterans of World  
Wars.  
3. Obligations or Securities of any Foreign Government, Bank, or  
Corporation.  
4. Copyrighted material, unless permission of the copyright  
owner has been obtained or the copying falls within the ìfair  
useî or library reproduction rights provisions of the copyright  
law.  
NOTE: Further information on these provisions may be obtained  
from the Copyright Office, Library of Congress, Washington, D.C.  
20559. Ask for Circular R21.  
5. Certificates of Citizenship or Naturalization.  
NOTE: Foreign Naturalization Certificates may be photographed.  
6. Passports.  
NOTE: Foreign passports may be photographed.  
7. Immigration Papers.  
8. Draft Registration Cards.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Selective Service Induction Papers, which bear any of the  
following information:  
Registrantís earnings or income  
Registrantís previous military service  
Registrantís dependency status  
Registrantís physical or mental condition  
Registrantís court record  
NOTE: U.S. Army and Navy discharge certificates may be  
photographed.  
10. Badges, Identification Cards, Passes, or insignia carried by  
Military, Naval personnel, or by members of the various  
Federal Departments and Bureaus, such as FBI or Treasury,  
unless the photograph is ordered by head of such department  
or bureau.  
11. Copying the following is also prohibited in certain states:  
Automobile Licenses  
Driver Licenses  
Automobile Certificates of Title  
The above list is not all inclusive, and no liability is assumed for its  
completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult your attorney.  
xvi  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Illegal Usage in Canada  
Parliament, by statute, has forbidden the copying of the following  
subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of fines or  
imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such  
copies.  
1. Current bank notes or current paper money.  
2. Obligations or securities of a government or bank.  
3. Exchequer bill paper or revenue paper.  
4. The public seal of Canada or of a province, or the seal of a  
public body or authority in Canada, or of a court of law.  
5. Proclamations, orders, regulations or appointments, or notices  
thereof (with intent to falsely cause same to purport to have  
been printed by the Queenís Printer for Canada, or the  
equivalent printer for a province).  
6. Marks, brands, seals, wrappers, or designs used by or on  
behalf of the Government of Canada or of a province, the  
government of a state other than Canada or a department,  
board, commission, or agency established by the Government  
of Canada or of a province or of a government of a state other  
than Canada.  
7. Impressed or adhesive stamps used for the purpose of  
revenue by the Government of Canada or of a province or by  
the government of a state other than Canada.  
8. Documents, registers, or records kept by the public officials  
charged with the duty of making or issuing certified copies  
thereof, where the copy falsely purports to be a certified copy  
thereof.  
9. Copyrighted material or trademarks of any manner or kind  
without the consent of the copyright or trademark owner.  
The above list is provided for your convenience and assistance,  
but it is not all inclusive and no liability is assumed for its  
completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult your solicitor.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Product Recycling and Disposal  
Xerox operates a worldwide equipment takeback and reuse/  
recycle program. Contact your Xerox sales representative (1-800-  
ASK-XEROX) to determine whether this Xerox product is part of  
the program. For more information about Xerox environmental  
programs, visit www.xerox.com/environment.html.  
If your product is not part of the Xerox program and you are  
managing its disposal, please note that the product may contain  
lead, mercury and other materials whose disposal may be  
regulated due to environmental considerations. For recycling and  
disposal information, contact your local authorities. In the United  
States, you may also refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance  
web site: www.eiae.org.  
xviii  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About this guide  
The Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and  
Administrator Guide provides information and procedures for  
using the Process Manager applications.  
About this chapter  
This chapter explains the information found in this guide and how  
the information is organized. It helps you get the most out of this  
guide by:  
Identifying the audience and the basic skills required to use  
this guide effectively.  
Explaining the standard conventions and cues that highlight  
important information.  
Listing related documentation you might find helpful.  
Listing available online FreeFlow Process Manager Help  
systems.  
Providing information on ordering additional materials and  
supplies.  
Providing information on obtaining additional information.  
NOTE:  
NOTE: If you are using Process Manager for the first time, it is  
recommended that you first read Chapter 1, About Process  
Manager, in this guide.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Audience  
The Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and  
Administrator Guide is a comprehensive reference manual  
intended for administrators and operators.  
How to recognize important information  
The following sections provide the conventions and flag icons that  
are used in the Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and  
Administrator Guide.  
Conventions  
The Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and  
Administrator Guide uses the conventions listed in the table,  
below, to help you recognize information:  
Table 1-1. Description of conventions  
Convention  
Description  
<CAPS in angle  
brackets>  
Within procedures, the names of keys to  
press are displayed in capital letters and  
enclosed in angle brackets (for example,  
press <ESCAPE>).  
Keyboard combinations are represented by  
the plus sign (+) between names of keys  
(for example, press <CONTROL+C> to  
copy).  
<Angle brackets>  
Variable information is enclosed in angle  
brackets (for example, select <filename>).  
Names of options you select, including  
toolbar buttons and buttons in dialog boxes,  
are enclosed in square brackets (for  
example, select [Close]).  
[Square brackets]  
Menu commands are also displayed in  
square brackets, with the menu name  
appearing first, then a colon, followed by the  
option name (for example, select [File:  
Close]).  
Text you should enter exactly as it appears  
is displayed in bold (for example, enter  
test1.rdo).  
Bold  
xx  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Table 1-1. Description of conventions  
Convention  
Description  
Titles of documents and manuals that  
provide additional information on the current  
topic are displayed in italics (for example,  
the Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager  
Operator and Administrator Guide).  
Italics  
Flag icons  
The Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and  
Administrator Guide uses the following flag icons to help you  
recognize important information:  
NOTE: The NOTE symbol and text in italics indicate there is  
important or supplemental information when performing a task or  
procedure.  
CAUTION: The CAUTION symbol and bold text indicate that  
you may lose data or damage equipment if care is not taken  
when performing the task or procedure following the caution.  
WARNING: The WARNING symbol and red text indicate that you  
may cause personal injury or death if care is not taken when  
performing the task or procedure following the warning.  
Step-by-step  
The step-by-step icon identifies the beginning of a procedure.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Related information  
This section lists additional materials you may need, or find  
helpful, when using your FreeFlow Process Manager system.  
To order the Xerox documentation listed below, or for additional  
information on Xerox solutions, contact your Xerox  
Representative.  
FreeFlow Process Manager documentation  
For more information on FreeFlow Process Manager, refer to the  
following publications:  
Xerox FreeFlow System Administrator Guide  
Xerox Customer Software Release Document (CSRD) for  
FreeFlow Process Manager  
Windows related information  
Microsoft provides users and administrators with several different  
resources to support the Windows 2003 environment. Some of  
these resources include web sites and online Help. The following  
sections describe these sources and tell you how to find and use  
them.  
Windows Online Help  
Windows 2003 Server includes extensive online Help for all  
aspects of the operating system. Most likely, the online Help will  
be your primary source for information. Administrative procedures,  
from adding users and managing groups to installing Windows  
printers, can be found in the online Help files. Furthermore, most  
Windows applications also contain their own online Help system  
containing information that is specific to the application.  
To access online Help, select [Start: Help] from the Windows task  
bar. If you are looking for help within a specific application, use the  
options available from the Help menu within that application.  
xxii  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Windows Microsoft Web site  
Microsoft has a World Wide Web site that contains the latest  
Windows 2003 Server news and information about upgrades. The  
URL for this site is:  
http://www.microsoft.com/  
Using the FreeFlow Process Manager Online Help  
This section provides a brief overview of the type of Help available  
online from the FreeFlow Process Manager software.  
You can access the FreeFlow Process Manager Online Help  
system by selecting [<application> Help] in the Help menu,  
located on the main window menu bar in each Process Manager  
application. You can also access Help by selecting the [Help]  
button, when available, in dialog boxes.  
Finding a Help topic  
In Help, click one of the following tabs:  
To browse through topics by category, select the Contents  
tab.  
To see a list of index entries, select the Index tab; you can  
then either search or scroll through the list or keywords.  
To search for words or phrases that might be contained in a  
Help topic, select the Search tab.  
In the left of the Help window, click the topic, index entry, or phrase  
to display the corresponding topic in the right frame.  
NOTE: Under the Index tab and the Search tab, you must select  
<Display> to show the highlighted topic in the right frame.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
xxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To get Help in a dialog box  
Select the question mark [?] in the title bar of the dialog box, and  
then click the item in the dialog box you need help with.  
NOTE: You can print or copy the information in a pop-up window  
by right-clicking inside the pop-up window, and then selecting  
[Print Topic] or [Copy].  
NOTE: If the dialog box does not have the [?] button, press <F1>  
or search for the item in the Help system.  
NOTE: You can also get Help with an item by right-clicking on it,  
and selecting [What's This?].  
Using the Process Manager Help system  
For detailed information on using the online Help system, refer to  
the topic “Using Help” in the Process Manager online help.  
xxiv  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Obtaining additional support  
For additional information about the following topics, refer to the  
Xerox Customer Software Release Document (CSRD) for  
FreeFlow Process Manager:  
X-PRESS FAX  
FreeFlow FAQ Xerox web site  
Xerox Welcome Center  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
xxv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
xxvi  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
1. About FreeFlow Process  
Manager  
This section provides information about Xerox FreeFlow Process  
Manager applications, hardware and software components,  
preparatory steps for workflow building and job management, user  
and group access, the log in process, adding and removing  
printers, creating Preps Job files, and backup and restore  
functions.  
FreeFlow Process Manager applications  
FreeFlow Process Manager consists of three applications that  
allow you to create, submit, and manage automated workflows:  
Workflow Builder  
Workflow Submission Client  
Workflow Job Manager  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
The Workflow Builder application  
Use Workflow Builder to:  
Create workflows  
Use graphical tools to assemble customized workflows  
from workflow process steps.  
Configure the settings for workflow process steps.  
Enable workflows to receive jobs.  
Disable workflows to modify them or to prevent job  
submission.  
Import and export workflows.  
Take processes offline and change concurrency counts.  
Create preflight profiles by launching Adobe Acrobat.  
Set up and manage hot folders.  
Add external PDF processes to support third party software.  
Set up third-party scripts.  
Set up Notify attributes on the SMTP server; set up the Proxy  
server.  
Set up repository credentionals.  
The Workflow process steps include:  
Table 1-1. Workflow process steps  
Description  
Step  
Input  
Displays automatically as the first workflow node when you select  
<Enter> during new workflow creation. Does not have a settings  
dialog in Workflow Builder. In Workflow Job Manager, the  
settings dialog and the tool tip display the original input files.  
AIE  
Automatic Image Enhancement (AIE) optimizes sharpness, color  
balance, saturation, exposure, noise reduction and contrast of  
TIFF, JPEG, and BMP images, whether standalone or embedded  
in a PDF. AIE also supports redeye removal for humans and  
shadow detail enhancement. The AIE feature works only for color  
and grayscale images.  
Convert  
Converts documents submitted to the workflow to PDF. Converts  
the following formats: MS Word, MS PowerPoint, MS Excel  
(includes Microsoft Office 2007), MS Publisher, Adobe  
Photoshop, Adobe InDesign, Adobe Illustrator, JPG, JPEG, TIFF,  
TIFF-IT, TIF, BMP, PS, RDO, QXD, QXP, VPC, and EPS.  
Allows you to flatten PDFs for printing.  
Users can select from various job options to generate optimal  
PDFs.  
Join  
Combines multiple PDF files into a single PDF file.  
1-2  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Table 1-1. Workflow process steps  
Step  
Description  
Optimize  
The Optimize process allows you to modify a PDF file to be PDF/  
X compliant, specify how fonts should be embedded, define PDF  
Box settings, configure spot color settings, and manage color  
profiles. You can also remove trap layers and replace hairlines.  
Preflight  
Uses a preflight profile to validate and check formatting, verify the  
image, fonts, and verify references to OPI image server images.  
The preflight checks depend on the profile selected.  
You can also use Preflight to let the workflow automatically  
discover conditions. For example, you can create a single-rule  
profile, use it as a filter to check a file for a specific condition, for  
example, a certain page size, and then direct the file to the next  
appropriate process or workflow.  
Watermarks  
Allows you to add a text or image watermark to each page of an  
input PDF file. You can specify a combination of opaque or  
transparent images or text, in various alignments, that can  
appear either underneath or on top of the page content. The  
Preview option allows you to dynamically view the content before  
committing to the selected settings.  
Bates  
Numbering  
Allows you to add bate stamps to each page of an input PDF file.  
Bate stamps consist of a page number with optional leading  
zeros and an optional fixed text prefix. An optional extra line of  
fixed text can appear either above or below the page number.  
The Preview option allows you to dynamically view the content  
before committing to the selected settings.  
Page  
Numbering  
Allows you to add page numbers to each page of an input PDF  
file. The Preview option allows you to dynamically view the  
content before committing to the selected settings.  
Barcode  
Allows you to add a barcode to your workflow. You can specify  
the barcode type, font, placement, alignment, rotation, frequency,  
size and other options. Provides support for variable data in the  
text and page range areas. The Preview option allows you to  
dynamically view the content before committing to the selected  
settings.  
Rotate Pages  
Allows you to rotate each page in the PDF file 90 degrees right or  
left, or 180 degrees.  
Flip Pages  
Resize  
Allows you to flip each page in the PDF file horizontally or  
vertically to create a mirror image.  
Allows you to select a specific size, or a size based on a  
percentage of the original image size. For TIFFs, JPGs, or BMPs,  
the image is resized; for PDFs, the page is resized.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Table 1-1. Workflow process steps  
Step  
Description  
Impose  
Allows you to do the following:  
• Use imposition to define the placement of page elements.  
• Place crop marks.  
• Select various job types—for example, signature booklets and  
N-up.  
• When the PREPS impostion node is selected, choose from a list  
of preconfigured PREPS imposition job files.  
• Select from various PDF Boxes.  
• Select Cell Clustering, which provides the option of pulling  
together cells on a sheet in a way that results in cell sizes that  
contain the imposed page image with no waste space between  
cells.  
The Preview option allows you to dynamically view the content  
before committing to the selected settings.  
Crop  
Allows you to automatically crop jobs consisting of one or more  
PDF pages and JPEG, TIFF, or BMP file images. For PDF  
documents, crops the pages; for JPEG, TIFF, or BMP files, crops  
the images.  
Pressmarks  
Allows you to add a fixed pressmark to a workflow. You can  
specify the pressmark placement, rotation, frequency, and  
transparency, and then preview the specifications. The Preview  
option allows you to dynamically view the content before  
committing to the selected settings.  
Review  
Can be used multiple times, at critical points in a workflow, to  
view, check and edit the PDF file using Adobe Acrobat.  
When stopped at the Review step, you can change process  
settings, resubmit the job to a previous step for additional  
processing, view a soft proof, or print a hardcopy proof.  
You can approve the job and allow it to move to the next step in  
the workflow, or you can fail the job.  
If there is a Print step after the Review step, you can select  
[Copies] to access the Copies dialog and change the number of  
copies to print.  
Notify  
Print  
Provides job status notification via e-mail. Allows you to attach  
job files up to a maximum size of 1 GB.  
Allows you to print PDF, VPC, or RDO (for reprint) files to a  
specified production printing queue using a specified job ticket.  
For information about reprinting RDOs, refer to the topic “About  
submitting RDOs.”  
Save  
Allows you to save all supported file types from the workflow to a  
specified location in a Windows file system or document  
repository.  
You can also use Save to direct or “branch” a job to other  
workflows by designating a hot folder as the Save location.  
1-4  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Table 1-1. Workflow process steps  
Step  
Description  
JDF Export  
Creates a JDF ticket and exports a PDF and JDF ticket to a  
specified location in a Windows file system or document  
repository. You have the option to export the JDF with changes  
made by the external process nodes.  
The output file of a JDF export task can be re-imported and re-  
run by dropping it into a hot folder associated with an appropriate  
workflow. The files associated with the JDF must exist in the  
same location as the original job.  
Conditional  
Conditional branching provides an added level of logic to a  
workflow, allowing it to examine the properties of submitted jobs,  
and then act accordingly without human intervention.  
You can add one or more conditional branches to a workflow,  
each with one or more user-designated conditions that specify  
the desired attributes or properties of the submitted jobs.  
External  
Process  
External Processes enable the use of third party workflow  
components. The processes are added and configured in  
Workflow Job Manager.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
The Workflow Submission Client application  
Use Workflow Submission Client to:  
Select files for submission from WIndows or from a document  
repository.  
Save and load a file list.  
Select an optional job ticket for submission with the files.  
Submit the files to one of the automated workflows.  
Modify the workflow process settings.  
View the job ticket and resolve job ticket conflicts.  
Launch Workflow Buider  
Submit files remotely from a workstation or server with  
Remote Workflow Submission Client installed.  
1-6  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
The Workflow Job Manager application  
Use Workflow Job Manager to:  
View job details and status.  
Review and edit jobs in Adobe Acrobat.  
Edit process settings.  
Print hardcopy proofs.  
Identify faulted jobs.  
Resubmit jobs.  
Approve, fail, pause, or delete jobs.  
Generate, view, and export reports.  
Launch Workflow Submission Client, Workflow Builder, Printer  
Registration, and FreeFlow Administration Tool.  
Review and configure incoming third party jobs from  
Management Information Systems (MIS).  
Perform selected tasks remotely from a workstation or server  
with Remote Workflow Job Manager Client installed.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
FreeFlow Process Manager hardware and software configurations  
For information pertaining to FreeFlow Process Manager  
hardware and software configurations, refer to the Xerox  
Customer Software Release Document (CSRD) for FreeFlow  
Process Manager.  
1-8  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Post-installation setup  
Table 1-2 provides a post-installation checklist you must complete  
after your FreeFlow Process Manager system has been installed.  
NOTE: This checklist assumes that a Xerox Representative has  
installed of all hardware and software necessary to run the  
FreeFlow Process Manager system.  
Table 1-2. Workflow and Job Management Preparatory Procedures  
Procedure  
Overview  
Configure document  
repository connections  
Use the FreeFlow Administration Tool to configure the connection between  
FreeFlow Process Manager and the supported document repositories.  
For detailed procedures on configuring repository connections, refer to the  
System Administrator Guide or to the FreeFlow Administration Tool online Help  
system.  
Create user accounts;  
add or edit user contact  
information; change  
XDL Admin account  
password  
Creating User Accounts Process Manager user accounts are created and  
managed using the Windows Local Users and Groups functionality in the  
Computer Management application. Users that are created and added to the  
appropriate Process Manager group accounts using Windows appear in the  
FreeFlow Administration Tool list of users.  
Storing User contact information The FreeFlow Administration Tool is  
used to view user accounts that have been created in Windows, and to add or  
edit user contact information.  
Changing the XDL Admin account password  
The FreeFlow Administration Tool allows you to change the password for the  
XDL Admin account. This password is set during the installation of the software.  
For detailed procedures on creating user accounts, refer to the Windows online  
help. For detailed procedures on adding or editing user contact information or  
changing the XDL Admin account password, refer to the System Administrator  
Guide or to the FreeFlow Administration Tool online Help system.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Table 1-2. Workflow and Job Management Preparatory Procedures  
Procedure  
Overview  
Manage production  
printers for workflows  
Production printers must be added to FreeFlow Process Manager before you  
attempt to drag a Print process into a workflow during the workflow building  
process.  
In FreeFlow 6.0, a new common printer interface enables all FreeFlow  
applications to maintain a single database of configured printers and to have a  
common job setup GUI interface across FreeFlow applications. The common  
printer interface includes the following utilities:  
Registered Printer List Locator: Allows you to set whether the registered  
printer list in use by a FreeFlow applicaton is located on a local computer or on a  
remote computer.  
Printer Registration: Allows you to register and manage supported  
production printers and queues for use by FreeFlow software applications. To  
configure the Print process step in a workflow, production printers must first be  
added via the FreeFlow Printer Registration application.  
Printer Status/Job Status Tool: Allows you to status jobs, queues, and  
printers.  
For additional information about Production Printing, refer to the Xerox  
Customer Software Release Document for FreeFlow Process Manager,  
or the Xerox Production Printing Guide for FreeFlow Applications.  
You can also access the online Help for the Registered Printer List Locator,  
Printer Registration, or the Printer Status/Job Status Tool.  
Configure the SMTP  
server  
The Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) Server is used for e-mail  
notification. The SMTP Setup dialog, accessed via the Workflow Builder  
application, allows you to identify the mail server for outgoing mail or  
notifications and to establish the maximum size for e-mail attachments.  
For details, refer to the following procedure in the Freeflow Process Manager  
Operator and Administrator Guide or the online help: “Setting up the SMTP  
Server.”  
Set up workflows  
Three default workflows are provided with the software: Simple, Main, and  
Reprint. Modify these workflows or create your own, based on the needs of your  
organization. You may want to name workflows based on clients (XYZ Co.) or  
types of jobs (brochure, newsletter, flyer).  
For details, refer to the following procedure in the Freeflow Process Manager  
Operator and Administrator Guide or the online help: “Configuring process  
settings;” “Building a new workflow.”  
Generate the preflight  
profile repository on a  
clean install.  
Preflight profiles do not exist on a clean install. You will need to generate the  
profile repository.  
For details, refer to the following procedure in the Freeflow Process Manager  
Operator and Administrator Guide or the online help: “Configuring preflight  
settings.”  
1-10  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Table 1-2. Workflow and Job Management Preparatory Procedures  
Procedure  
Overview  
Create or modify  
preflight profiles.  
The preflight step validates and checks formatting and verifies the image, fonts  
and references to OPI image server images. You may want to modify the  
preflight profiles that are provided with FreeFlow Process Manager.  
For details, refer to the following procedure in the Freeflow Process Manager  
Operator and Administrator Guide or the online help: “Creating preflight  
profiles.  
Set the default job  
option in Adobe  
Acrobat  
For the Convert process, you can select from various job options, or create  
custom job options, to generate optimal PDFs in Process Manager. The default  
job option that is displayed in Process Manager is selected in Adobe Acrobat  
Distiller. You can ensure that Process Manager displays the desired Adobe  
Acrobat Distiller default job option by selecting a profile from the Default Settings  
drop box in Acrobat Distiller.  
For details, refer to the following procedure in the Freeflow Process Manager  
Operator and Administrator Guide or the online help: “Configuring Convert  
settings.”  
Upgrade legacy  
workflows that contain  
the Job Level Edit  
process.  
In previous versions of FreeFlow Process Manager, all job level edit functions  
(for example, watermarks, page numbering, page rotation) were available via a  
single Job Level Edit dialog. Legacy workflows that contain Job Level Edit  
processes will perform as they did in earlier versions, but you will not be able to  
edit them. To use the version 6.0 job level edit functions, save the existing Job  
Level Edit workflow, and it will be converted into a series of individual,  
Watermark, Bates Numbering, Page Numbering, Flip and Rotate nodes, as  
appropriate.  
For details, refer to the following procedure in the Freeflow Process Manager  
Operator and Administrator Guide or the online help: “Upgrading legacy  
workflows that contain the Job Level Edit process.”  
Ensure Color Manage  
workflow consistency  
Workflows that include color management can become inconsistent between the  
Process Manager server and the remote client when profiles are uninstalled on  
between the server and the server.  
a remote client.  
Color profiles are now managed in the Optimize node Color tab.  
Importing 5.0  
workflows with a Color  
Manage node.  
If you import a 5.0 workflow with a Color Manage node into FreeFlow Process  
Manager 6.0, the 5.0 Color Manage icon is converted to an Optimize icon and  
the settings transfer automatically to the Optimize settings Color tab.  
For information, refer to the Ensuring Color Manage workflow consistency  
between the server and a remote client procedure and Importing a 5.0  
workflow with a Color Manage node.  
Import ICC profiles  
ICC profile rights  
Import any required ICC profiles.  
You must own the rights to use the ICC profiles accessed by FreeFlow Process  
Manager.  
For details, refer to the following procedure in the Freeflow Process Manager  
Operator and Administrator Guide or the online help: “To import an ICC  
profile.”  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Table 1-2. Workflow and Job Management Preparatory Procedures  
Procedure  
Overview  
Set up hot folders  
You may want to designate hot folders ahead of time.  
You can open a common browse folder dialog and select or create a folder in the  
system via the Hot Folders dialog in Workflow Builder.  
You can:  
Schedule all hot folders for the same times of day or schedule hot folders  
individually.  
Pause/resume all hot folders or individual hot folders.  
Enable file clustering on a per hot folder basis.  
For details, refer to the following procedure in the Freeflow Process Manager  
Operator and Administrator Guide or the online help: “Setting up a hot  
folder.”  
Set up external  
processes  
You may want to add external processes to support third party software, or to  
set up third party scripts.  
For details, refer to the following procedure in the Freeflow Process Manager  
Operator and Administrator Guide or the online help: “Using third party  
external processes.  
Set up Preps  
To use Preps, you will need to install it, configure the default Preps workflow,  
and create and save Preps job files.  
For details, refer to the following procedure in the Freeflow Process Manager  
Operator and Administrator Guide or the online help: “Setting up Preps.”  
1-12  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Using the FreeFlow Administration Tool  
The FreeFlow Administration Tool provides the following options:  
Repository icon: Displays the Repository Connections tab,  
where you can administer the connections between a  
Repository Management System (RMS) server to available  
Document Management System (DMS) repositories.  
Conversion Settings icon: Displays the Conversion Settings  
tab which contains the settings for the dynamic conversion of  
documents uploaded to document repositories. These settings  
will serve as the defaults for the File Conversion Tool  
application.  
Process Manager icon: Available only on machines running  
FreeFlow Process Manager. Opens the following tabs:  
Backup: Allows you to back up FreeFlow Process  
Manager user and group information, workflows, jobs, and  
task information to a user selectable directory location.  
Restore: Allows you to restore previously back up  
FreeFlow Process Manager user and group information,  
workflows, jobs and task information.  
User Accounts icon: Available only on machines running  
FreeFlow Process Manager. Displays tabs used to view and  
edit select FreeFlow Process Manager user account contact  
information.  
Process Manager user accounts are created and managed  
using the Windows Local Users and Groups functionality in the  
Computer Management application. Users that are created  
and added to the appropriate Process Manager group  
accounts using Windows will appear in the FreeFlow  
Administration Tool list of users. The following options are  
available:  
Storing User contact information: The FreeFlow  
Administration Tool is used to view user accounts created  
in Windows, and to add or edit user contact information.  
Changing the XDL Admin account password:The  
FreeFlow Administration Tool allows you to change the  
password for the XDL Admin account. This password is set  
during the installation of the software.  
For more information refer to the Xerox FreeFlow System  
Administrator Guide and the FreeFlow Administration Tool online  
Help system.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Legacy Document Library  
Document Library is no longer available with the FreeFlow 6.0  
product offering. Supported document repositories in FreeFlow  
6.0 include Xerox Docushare and SharePoint.  
NOTE: Any previous version of FreeFlow Makeready, FreeFlow  
Process Manager, and FreeFlow Web Services customers using  
Document Library, must migrate to a supported repository. For  
more information, contact your Xerox representative.  
Document conversion  
Previously, Document Library users used the background batch  
utility, provided via the Conversion tab in the Library  
Administration Tool, to convert documents within Document  
Library cabinets to PDF.  
In FreeFlow 6.0, you may wish to use the FreeFlow File  
Conversion Tool, available via the Start menu, to convert  
documents residing in file systems or repositories to PDF.  
Managing backup and restore functions  
In FreeFlow 6.0, the customer is ultimately responsible for backing  
up and restoring the FreeFlow system, whereas in previous  
versions of FreeFlow, a backup strategy was recommended.  
The FreeFlow Administration Tool is used to back up and restore  
FreeFlow Process ManagerProcess Manager user information,  
workflow, job, and task information to a user-selectable directory  
location.  
For detailed information about backing up and restoring data with  
the FreeFlow Administration Tool, refer to the FreeFlow  
Administration Tool online Help.  
1-14  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Logging in to the FreeFlow Process Manager applications  
You can open all FreeFlow Process Manager applications via the  
Start menu or the Control Center shortcut bar.  
You can open Workflow Builder via Workflow Submission  
Client and Workflow Job Manager.  
You can open Workflow Submission Client via Workflow Job  
Manager.  
Process Manager user accounts are created and managed using  
the Windows Local Users and Groups functionality in the  
Computer Management application. During install, Xerox  
FreeFlow Process Manager Administrators and Xerox  
FreeFlowProcess Manager Operators groups are created. Your  
administrator then populates these groups with users.  
Permissions to launch applications are based on group  
membership. For more information, see Group membership and  
When attempting to open a FreeFlow Process Manager  
application:  
If you are currently logged into a Process Manager server, but  
are not a member of either the Xerox FreeFlow Process  
Manager Administrators or Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager  
Operators group, a message displays and you may not have  
permission to run the application. This also applies to logged-  
in users on remote client machines.  
If you are currently logged into a Process Manager server, are  
a member of the Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Operators  
group, and you are attempting to access an application that  
requires Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Administrators  
group privileges, a login screen displays and you must enter  
the required credentials. This also applies to logged-in users  
on remote client machines  
If you have permission to launch an application by virtue of  
membership in an authorizing group, the application launches  
without asking for credentials. See your administrator for  
questions about your user account.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Authorization error message  
The Windows OS caches a user's group membership  
information. If you add yourself to an authorization group (e.g.,  
Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Administrators) and then try to  
launch an application, you will receive an error message indicating  
you do not have permission to launch FreeFlow Process Manager  
applications.To rectify this issue, log off and then log back on.  
1-16  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
To log in to the FreeFlow Process Manager applications  
If you enter the incorrect username or password, you receive an  
incorrect username or password error message. You can then  
enter your correct username and password.  
1. Select [Start: Programs: Xerox FreeFlow Software:  
FreeFlow Process Manager: <application>]. The Login  
dialog opens for the selected application.  
2. In the User name text box, enter your user name.  
3. In the Password text box, enter your password.  
4. The Domain text box is populated with the domain of the  
currently logged in user, or the last domain entered in the login  
form. Confirm that the proper domain name appears.  
5. Enter the appropriate Process Manager server name in the  
Server text box.  
6. Select [OK]. The main window for the selected application  
opens.  
Group membership and authorization  
The following table shows authorization based on membership in  
FreeFlow Process Manager Administrators or FreeFlow Process  
Manager Operators groups.  
Table 1-3. Group Membership and Authorization  
Administrator  
Operator  
Can launch Workflow Job Manager,  
Workflow Submission Client, Manifest  
Automation from Xerox (MAX)  
Can launch Workflow Job Manager, Workflow  
Submission Client, Manifest Automation from  
Xerox (MAX)  
Can launch Workflow Builder  
Cannot launch Workflow Builder  
Can launch FreeFlow Adminstrator Tool  
and perform all adminstrative tasks  
Can launch FreeFlow Adminstrator Tool and edit  
repository connnection information  
NOTE: Printer Registration also supports user authentication  
through the operating system and application-level authorization  
through membership in operating system groups.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Managing production printers  
In FreeFlow 5.0, Workflow Printer Administration was used to  
configure and manage production printers. In FreeFlow 6.0, a new  
common printer interface enables all FreeFlow applications to  
maintain a single database of configured printers and to have a  
common job setup GUI interface across FreeFlow applications.  
The common printer interface includes the following utilities:  
Registered Printer List Locator: Allows you to set whether  
the registered printer list in use by a FreeFlow application is  
located on a local computer or a remote computer.  
Printer Registration: Allows you to register and manage  
supported production printers and queues for use by FreeFlow  
software applications. To configure the Print process step in a  
workflow, production printers must first be added via the  
FreeFlow Printer Registration application.  
Printer Status/Job Status Tool: Allows you to status jobs,  
queues, and printers.  
Xerox FreeFlow Common Printer Administrators group  
In order to make changes to registered printers with the Printer  
Registration tool, a user must be a member of the Xerox FreeFlow  
Common Printer Administrators group.  
A logged-in user who is a member of the group has full access to  
the add/edit functionality in the Printer Registration tool.  
If the user is not a member of the group, the error message “The  
logged in user does not have administrative access” displays and  
the tool runs in read-only mode. A login dialog, accessed from the  
file menu, allows the user to log in and turn on the add/edit  
functionality. The login dialog requires a user name, a password,  
and a domain.  
1-18  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
To register and add a production printer  
1. Select [Start: Programs: Xerox FreeFlow Software: Printer  
Registration], or in Workflow Job Manager, select [Launch:  
Printer Registration]. The Installed Products dialog displays.  
2. Ensure the radio button for Process Manager is marked.  
3. Select [OK].  
4. In the Printer Registration dialog, select the desired task:  
[Add...], [View/Edit...], or [Delete].  
5. For additional information about registering and managing  
printers, select [Help] in the Printer Registration dialog to open  
the online Help.  
For additional information about Production Printing, refer to the  
Xerox Customer Software Release Document for FreeFlow  
Process Manager, or the Xerox Production Printing Guide for  
FreeFlow Applications, or access the online Help for the  
Registered Printer List Locator, Printer Registration, or the Printer  
Status/Job Status Tool.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Setting up Preps  
To use PREPS, install PREPS in the following way:  
NOTE: FreeFlow Process Manager, Version 6.0, supports Kodak  
PREPS 5.2.2.  
NOTE: When the PREPS documentation uses the term Xerox  
DigiPath, it is referring to FreeFlow.  
For Setup Type, select the Custom Install.  
Select the following components during installation:  
PREPS Program  
Languages  
Xerox Digipath  
Automation  
iKey Hardware Key Driver or Sentinel Hardware Key  
Driver  
You also have to physically install the appropriate hardware key.  
Once PREPS is installed, you need to perform the following:  
Configure PREPS to use the Default workflow PDF to PDF.  
Create and save PREPS Job files.  
See also  
1-20  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
To configure the Preps default workflow  
1. Start PREPS.  
2. Select [Edit: Preferences...] to display the Preferences  
dialog.  
3. Select the [General] tab. In the Default workflow box, select  
[PDF -> PDF].  
4. Select [OK] to close the Preferences dialog.  
5. Select [Setup: Save Profile...] to display the Save Profile  
dialog.  
6. In the Profile Name text box, ensure that “default” is entered,  
and select [OK] to save the profile.  
7. If the message “Profile default already exists. Overwrite  
anyway.” displays, select [Yes].  
8. Exit Preps.  
9. The Save current configuration dialog prompts “Do you want  
to save the current configuration into the profile,” select [Yes].  
Preps closes.  
NOTE: The profile must be manually edited in a text editor to allow  
output to a PDF file. After completing steps 1-9, above, do the  
following:  
10. On the Process Manager server, locate the file “default.cfg”  
under <Preps Install dir>\Preps 5.2\Profiles\Default.  
11. Open the file with a text editor.  
a. Double-click “default.cfg”.  
b. In the Windows dialog, select [Select the program from a  
list], and select [OK].  
c. In the Open With dialog, select Notepad, and select [OK].  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
12. Find and change the following entries:  
Change -O:P to -O:D  
Change -ADOBEPJTF:NO to -ADOBEPJTF:YES  
Change -JDFOUTPUT:YES to -JDFOUTPUT:NO  
Change -EXPORTPDF:NO to -EXPORTPDF:YES  
Change SkipDeviceSizeWarning:NO to  
SkipDeviceSizeWarning:YES  
13. Save and close the file.  
14. For Preps 5.2.2, make the default.cfg readonly once you have  
made all changes:  
a. In Windows Explorer, select the default .cfg file.  
b. Right -click and select [Properties].  
c. In the General Tab, in the Attributes area, mark the check  
box for [Read-only].  
d. Select [OK].  
15. If there is a .cfg file under <Preps Install dir>\Preps  
5.2\Profiles, make the same changes as in steps 11 - 13 to this  
file, also.  
To create and save Preps Job files  
When you use PREPS, the FreeFlow Workflow Builder system  
searches the Imposition Jobs directory for Preps files with a .job  
suffix. Since no default .job files are provided, the user must  
create them.  
1. Start PREPS.  
2. To create a new PDF job, select [File: New Job: PDF->PDF]  
3. In the Signature List window, select [Signatures...] to open  
the Signature Selection dialog.  
4. In the Signature Selection dialog, select a style from the list in  
the Binding style drop box.  
5. Click [+] to expand the Sample Templates tree and display a  
list of templates.  
1-22  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
6. In the displayed list of templates, click [+] to expand the  
desired template, then select the appropriate signature.  
7. Select [Add] to add the template and signature to the job file.  
The job file template displays in the Template/Signature/Page  
window.  
8. Select [OK] to close the Signature Selection dialog.The job file  
template displays in the Signature List window.  
You must select a device type for each signature.  
9. In the Signature List window, select the desired signature. The  
[Device...] button is enabled.  
10. Click [Device...].  
11. In the Choose Device window, select [Press Sheet Size] as  
the target device. You must select a device for each signature.  
12. Select [OK] to close the Choose Device window.  
13. To save the job file, select [File: Save Job] or [File: Save Job  
As...]. Either opens the Save Job As dialog.  
14. In the Save in list box, navigate to the FreeFlow Install  
Directory\ImpositionJobs directory, typically, E:\ FreeFlow\  
ImpositionJobs.  
15. Type the appropriate file name, and select [Save].  
16. Repeat steps 2-11 to add more job file templates.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
To select a device type for PREPS versions prior to 5.2.2  
You must select a device type for each signature in order to use  
old PREPS job files.  
1. Start PREPS.  
2. Select [Setup: Device Setup].  
3. Select [Press Sheet Size] in the “Installed Devices” section.  
4. Select [OK] to close the Device Setup dialog.  
5. Close the PREPS application. You can now use the old job  
files.  
For more information about device setup, refer to your PREPS  
documentation.  
Missing hardware key error  
If the ”Preps Server error, check Preps Automation Front-End  
server” error message is displayed on your PREPS UI or on the  
server that you are using to run PREPS, do the following, even if  
the PREPS hardware key is not missing:  
1. Stop the PREPS Automation Front-End server by performing  
one of the following:  
If there is a yellow folder icon (with the tooltip “Waiting for  
Jobs”) in the systray, double-click the icon to open the  
Preps UI.  
In the UI, select [File: Exit] to close PREPS.  
If there is not a yellow folder icon (with the tooltip “Waiting  
for Jobs”) in the systray, then the application must be  
stopped in the Windows Task Manager.  
Open Windows Task Manager, find the PrepsSlv.exe  
process, and end the process.  
Find the PrepsSrv.exe process and end the process.  
2. Close the FreeFlow Process Manager applications and shut  
down the FreeFlow Process Manager server.  
3. Reinsert the hardware key.  
4. Reboot the FreeFlow Process Manager server.  
5. Open the FreeFlow Process Manager applications and  
resubmit the job. The Preps Automation Front-End server  
starts automatically.  
1-24  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
Using PREPS with Adobe Acrobat 8.0  
When using Adobe Acrobat 8.0, after PREPS installation, you  
must change the PDF Conversion Acrobat directory.  
To use PREPS with Adobe Acrobat 8.0  
1. Start PREPS.  
2. Select [Edit: Preferences...] to display the Preferences  
dialog.  
3. Select the [PDF] tab.  
4. Select Adobe Acrobat and select the directory in which you  
installed Adobe Acrobat 8.0, for example C:\Program  
Files\Adobe\Acrobat 8.0\Acrobat.exe.  
5. Select [OK] to close the Preferences dialog.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FreeFlow Process Manager  
1-26  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
2. Workflow Builder  
Xerox FreeFlow Workflow Builder provides the ability to create  
workflows by dragging and dropping processes into a user-  
defined sequence. The optional ability to configure and add third  
party software workflow components to a workflow enhances the  
flexibility and capabilities of the Process Manager system.  
About Workflow Builder  
A workflow is a sequence of uniquely configured steps that define  
how a document is processed. Use Workflow Builder to:  
Create workflows  
Use graphical tools to assemble customized workflows  
from workflow process steps.  
Configure the settings for workflow process steps.  
Enable workflows to receive jobs.  
Disable workflows to modify them or to prevent job  
submission.  
Import and export workflows.  
Take processes offline and change concurrency counts.  
Create preflight profiles by launching Adobe Acrobat.  
Set up and manage hot folders.  
Add external PDF processes to support third party software.  
Set up third-party scripts.  
Set up Notify attributes on the SMTP server; set up the Proxy  
server.  
Set up repository credentionals.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
Logging in to Workflow Builder  
Process Manager user accounts are created and managed using  
the Windows Local Users and Groups functionality in the  
Computer Management application. During install, Xerox  
FreeFlow Process Manager Administrators and Xerox FreeFlow  
Process Manager Operators groups are created. Your  
administrator then populates these groups with users.  
Permissions to launch applications are based on group  
membership.  
NOTE: If you are not a member of an authorizing group, contact  
your administrator. If you forget your username and password,  
notify your administrator.  
To log in to Workflow Builder  
A login screen may or may not display, depending on group  
membership and server location.  
If you enter the incorrect username or password, you receive an  
incorrect username or password error message. You can then  
enter your correct username and password.  
1. Select [Start: Programs: Xerox FreeFlow Software:  
FreeFlow Process Manager: Workflow Builder]. The Login  
dialog opens for the selected application.  
2. In the User name text box, enter your user name.  
3. In the Password text box, enter your password.  
4. The Domain text box is populated with the domain of the  
currently logged in user, or the last domain entered in the login  
form. Confirm that the proper domain name appears.  
5. Enter the appropriate Process Manager server name in the  
Server text box.  
6. Select [OK]. The main window opens.  
2-2  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
Workflow Builder main window  
Two major areas comprise the Workflow Builder main window: the  
workflow list and the workspace.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Workflow list  
Workflow List  
Area  
The workflow list, in the upper portion of the window, includes the  
following components:  
Workspace  
Area  
Menu bar  
Workflows toolbar  
List of the current workflows  
Three default application workflows:  
Main Workflow  
Simple Workflow  
Reprint Workflow  
2-4  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Workflow list columns  
The workflow list contains the following columns:  
Table 2-1. Workflow list columns.  
Column  
Description  
Workflow Name  
Lists the names of the workflows.  
Lists the workflow Ids.  
Id  
Status  
Lists whether the workflow is Enabled, Disabled,  
Enabled-Busy, or Disabled-Busy.  
Date Modified  
Lists the time and date the workflow was last  
changed.  
Description  
Processes  
Displays workflow comments entered by users.  
Shows a small graphical representation of each  
workflow.  
Active Jobs  
Hot Folders  
Lists the number of active jobs.  
Lists the number of hot folders associated with the  
selected workflow.  
In the workflow list, you can sort the list by the items in any column  
by clicking the column heading.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Workspace  
The workspace, in the lower portion of the workflow window,  
includes the following components:  
Name of the currently selected workflow  
Workspace toolbar  
Workflow Process Options— the workflow building blocks  
Workspace—for workflow assembly, display, and modification  
When a user selects a workflow in the list, it is graphically  
displayed in the workspace. If the workflow is in the “disabled”  
status and does not currently have jobs that are being processed,  
it is available for editing.  
Zooming in and out of the workflow view  
For large or complex workflows, this feature allows more  
processes to be displayed in the workflow window. Three zoom  
levels are available:  
Small Icons: Displays small icons.  
Medium Icons: Displays mid-sized icons.  
Large Icons: Default; displays large icons.  
NOTE: To display the process name in this view, hover over a  
process with the mouse cursor to show the tool tip.  
2-6  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
To zoom in or zoom out  
Select [View: Workflow Icons], and then select the desired  
option, or  
Right-click in the graphical workflow area, select [Workflow  
Icons], and select the desired option.  
Expanding and restoring the viewing space  
The expand and restore capability provides more viewing space in  
selected areas.  
To expand and restore the view  
1. To expand the view, click the right-facing [Expand] arrow to  
the left of the title area—for example, “Workflows” in Workflow  
Builder.  
2. To restore the view to the original size, click the down-facing  
[Restore]arrow.  
Enabling and disabling process tool tips  
You can view process settings via tool tips in the graphical  
workflow display by positioning the mouse pointer over a workflow  
process.  
NOTE: In Workflow Job Manager, the tool tip for the Input node  
displays the original input files.  
To enable/disable tooltips  
bbb  
In the View menu,  
To enable tool tips, select [Show Process Tool Tips].  
To disable tool tips, select [Hide Process Tool Tips].  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Finding a process node  
The Find feature simplifies the task of locating process node in a  
workflow.  
To find a node  
1. In Workflow Builder, Workflow Job Manager or Workflow  
Submission Client, select a workflow or a job.  
2. Select [Edit: Find...].  
3. In the Find what text box, enter the process name and select  
[Find Next].  
4. If the process is located, it becomes the selected process.  
5. Select [Find Next] to locate the next instance of the process. If  
no additional processes are found, the Reached end of  
Workflow message displays.  
6. To continue the search from the beginning, select [OK].  
7. If the process is not located, a “Node name not found”  
message displays. Select [OK] to close the Not Found dialog.  
8. Begin a new search or close the dialog to end the search.  
2-8  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Workflow Builder menus  
The Workflow Builder menu bar provides commands for creating  
and modifying workflows.  
Commands can also be accessed by right-clicking on a workflow  
or workflow option to display the context menu. Menu items that  
are not available are grayed out.  
See also:  
The File menu  
The Workflow Builder File menu contains the following options:  
Table 2-2. Workflow Builder File menu  
File Menu  
Option  
Description  
New  
Adds a new workflow to the list. Provides a cursor  
for editing the workflow name. The new workflow is  
added to the list and graphically displayed in the  
workspace by a yellow Input folder.  
Save  
Saves changes to the workflow that is currently  
open for modification.  
Revert  
Import...  
Export...  
Exit  
Opens the selected workflow to its last saved state.  
Displays a confirmation dialog.  
Opens the Open dialog; allows you to choose .xml  
workflow files.  
Opens the Export dialog. Available if one or more  
workflows are selected.  
Closes the Workflow Builder application. If a  
workflow is open and has been changed since it  
was last saved, displays a confirmation dialog.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
The Edit menu  
The Workflow Builder Edit menu contains the following options:  
Table 2-3. Workflow Builder Edit menu  
Edit Menu Option  
Description  
Workflow  
Properties...  
Opens the workflow properties dialog, which allows you to edit  
the workflow name, add a description of the workflow, and  
enable submission to the workflow.  
Enable/Disable  
Enable: Allows a job to be submitted to the selected workflow.  
Enabled workflows are displayed in the Workflow Submission  
Client window. Enable also auto-saves the workflow.  
Disable: Prevents jobs from being submitted to the workflow.  
Disabled workflows are not visible or available via the Workflow  
Submission Client.  
Duplicate  
Adds a copy of the selected workflow to the list; provides a  
cursor for editing the workflow name. The user must select  
<Enter> to complete the duplication operation.  
Rename Workflow  
Highlights the selected workflow name and provides a cursor for  
editing the name. The workflow must first be disabled.  
Delete Workflow(s)  
Cut  
Deletes the selected workflow with a confirmation dialog.  
Deletes and stores the selected process and its properties for  
pasting into the same workflow.  
Copy  
Paste  
Stores the selected process and its properties for pasting  
elsewhere in the same workflow.  
Pastes the process stored in the clipboard.  
Paste as Fail Branch Pastes the process stored in the clipboard as a fail branch of the  
selected process.  
Delete Process  
Rename Process  
Process Settings...  
Find...  
Deletes the selected process.  
Invokes the process rename mode for the selected process.  
Opens the settings dialog for the selected workflow process.  
Opens the Find dialog, which allows you to locate a process  
node in a workflow.  
2-10  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
The View menu  
The View menu contains the following options:  
Table 2-4. Workflow Builder View menu  
View Menu Option  
Description  
Show/Hide Process Show: Allows you to view process settings via  
Tool Tips  
tool tips in the graphical workflow display by  
positioning the mouse pointer over a workflow  
process.  
Hide: Disables the tool tips.  
Workflow Icons  
Small Icons: Displays small icons.  
Medium Icons: Displays mid-sized icons.  
Large Icons: Default; displays large icons.  
The Options menu  
The Options menu includes the following options:  
Table 2-5. Workflow Builder Options menu  
Options Menu  
Option  
Description  
Processes  
Opens the Processes dialog, which allows you  
to check the status of a workflow process.  
Allows you to open the Process Settings  
dialog to place the process online or offline,  
and to check or change the concurrent count  
value.  
Impose Process Settings allows you to turn  
the copy count divisor functionality on or off.  
This allows you to to adjust the copy count to  
maintain the original quantity intent for  
workflows that contain multiple-up  
Hot Folders  
Opens the Hot Folders dialog, in which you  
can access the Hot Folder Setup dialog and  
manage existing hot folders. You can delete  
hot folders, pause and resume scanning for  
new files, open the Hot Folder Settings dialog,  
or check hot folder status.  
External Processes  
Opens the External Processes dialog, which  
allows you to move and delete processes, and  
to access various dialogs for adding and  
configuring external processes.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Table 2-5. Workflow Builder Options menu  
Options Menu  
Description  
Option  
SMTP Setup...  
Opens the SMTP Setup dialog, which allows  
you to set up the SMTP server for e-mail  
notification and to establish a maximum e-mail  
attachment size.  
Proxy Setup...  
Opens the Proxy Setup dialog, which is used  
to configure proxy settings. This enables the  
iWay Prime application to submit PDF jobs to  
Process Manager workflows.  
Preflight Setup...  
Opens Adobe Acrobat, which is used to  
configure preflight profiles.  
Repository  
Credentials Setup...  
Opens a dialog that allows the current user to  
enter a Username and Password for the  
active repository.  
Email Attachment  
Watermark Setup...  
Opens the Email Attachment Watermark  
Setup dialog. Allows you to set up and  
customize the security watermark on PDF  
documents sent via email notification.  
2-12  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
The Insert menu and workflow process icons  
The Workflow Builder Insert menu allows you to insert processes  
into a displayed workflow.  
To insert a process, select a process in a workflow, and select  
[Insert: <item>]. The new process is inserted to the right of the  
selected process.  
Workflow processes are also available as icons in the Workflow  
Process Options area. The icons can be dragged and dropped  
into the workspace to assemble a workflow. Processes marked  
with an asterisk (*) in the table, below, are not configurable.  
See also:  
Table 2-6. Workflow Builder Insert menu and workflow process icons  
Insert Menu  
Options  
Workflow  
Process Icon  
Description  
Input  
Displays automatically as the first workflow node when you  
select <Enter> during new workflow creation. Does not  
have a settings dialog in Workflow Builder. In Workflow Job  
Manager, the settings dialog and the tool tip display the  
original input files.  
NOTE: Not an  
Insert Menu  
option  
AIE  
Automatic Image Enhancement (AIE) optimizes sharpness,  
color balance, saturation, exposure, noise reduction and  
contrast of TIFF, JPEG, and BMP images, whether  
standalone or embedded in a PDF. AIE also supports  
redeye removal for humans and shadow detail  
enhancement. The AIE feature works only for color and  
grayscale images.  
Convert  
Converts documents submitted to the workflow to PDF.  
Converts the following formats: Microsoft Word, Microsoft  
Excel, Microsoft PowerPoint (including Microsoft Office  
2007), Microsoft Publisher, Adobe Photoshop, Adobe  
InDesign, Adobe Illustrator, JPG, JPEG, TIFF, TIFF-IT, TIF,  
BMP, PS, RDO, QXD, QXP, VPC and EPS.  
You can select from various job options to generate optimal  
PDFs.  
Allows you to flatten PDFs for printing.  
Join  
Combines multiple PDF files into a single PDF file.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Table 2-6. Workflow Builder Insert menu and workflow process icons  
Insert Menu  
Options  
Workflow  
Process Icon  
Description  
Optimize  
The Optimize process allows you to modify a PDF file to be  
PDF/X compliant, specify how fonts should be embedded,  
define PDF Box settings, configure spot color settings, and  
manage color profiles. You can also remove trap layers and  
replace hairlines.  
Preflight  
Uses a preflight profile to validate and check formatting,  
verify the image, fonts, and verify references to OPI image  
server images. The preflight checks depend on the profile  
selected.  
You can also use Preflight to let the workflow automatically  
discover conditions. For example, you can create a single-  
rule profile, use it as a filter to check a file for a specific  
condition, for example, a certain page size, and then direct  
the file to the next appropriate process or workflow.  
Watermarks  
Allows you to add a text or image watermark to each page  
of an input PDF file. You can specify a combination of  
opaque or transparent images or text, in various  
alignments, that can appear either underneath or on top of  
the page content. The Preview option allows you to  
dynamically view the content before you commit to the  
selected settings.  
Bates  
Numbering  
Allows you to add bate stamps to each page of an input  
PDF file. Bate stamps consist of a page number with  
optional leading zeros and an optional fixed text prefix. An  
optional extra line of fixed text can appear either above or  
below the page number. The Preview option allows you to  
dynamically view the content before committing to the  
selected settings.  
Page  
Numbering  
Allows you to add page numbers to each page of an input  
PDF file. The Preview option allows you to dynamically view  
the content before committing to the selected settings.  
Barcode  
Allows you to add a barcode to your workflow. You can  
specify the barcode type, font, placement, alignment,  
rotation, frequency, size and other options. Provides  
support for variable data in the text and page range areas.  
The Preview option allows you to dynamically view the  
content before committing to the selected settings.  
Rotate Pages  
Allows you to rotate each page in the PDF file 90 degrees  
right or left, or 180 degrees.  
2-14  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Table 2-6. Workflow Builder Insert menu and workflow process icons  
Insert Menu  
Options  
Workflow  
Process Icon  
Description  
Flip Pages  
Allows you to flip each page in the PDF file horizontally or  
vertically to create a mirror image.  
Resize  
Allows you to select a specific size, or a size based on a  
percentage of the original image size. For TIFFs, JPGs, or  
BMPs, the image is resized; for PDFs, the page is resized.  
Impose  
Allows you to do the following:  
• Use imposition to define the placement of page elements.  
• Place crop marks.  
• Select various job types—for example, signature booklets  
and N-up.  
• When the PREPS impostion node is selected, choose  
from a list of preconfigured PREPS imposition job files.  
• Select from various PDF Boxes.  
• Select Cell Clustering, which provides the option of pulling  
together cells on a sheet in a way that results in cell sizes  
that contain the imposed page image with no waste space  
between cells.  
The Preview option allows you to dynamically view the  
content before committing to the selected settings.  
Crop  
Allows you to automatically crop jobs consisting of one or  
more PDF pages and JPEG, TIFF, or BMP file images. For  
PDF documents, crops the pages; for JPEG, TIFF, or BMP  
files, crops the images.  
Pressmarks  
Allows you to add a fixed pressmark to a workflow. You can  
specify the pressmark placement, rotation, frequency, and  
transparency, and then preview the specifications.  
The Preview option allows you to dynamically view the  
content before committing to the selected settings.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Table 2-6. Workflow Builder Insert menu and workflow process icons  
Insert Menu  
Options  
Workflow  
Process Icon  
Description  
Review  
Can be used multiple times, at critical points in a workflow,  
to view, check and edit the PDF file using Adobe Acrobat.  
When stopped at the Review step, you can change process  
settings, resubmit the job to a previous step for additional  
processing, view a soft proof, or print a hardcopy proof.  
You can approve the job and allow it to move to the next  
step in the workflow, or you can fail the job.  
If there is a Print step after the Review step, you can select  
[Copies] to access the Copies dialog and change the  
number of copies to print.  
Notify  
Provides job status notification via e-mail. Allows you to  
attach job files up to a maximum size of 1 GB.  
Print  
Allows you to print PDF, VPC, or RDO (for reprint) files to a  
specified production printing queue using a specified job  
ticket.  
For information about reprinting RDOs, refer to the topic  
“About submitting RDOs.”  
Save  
Allows you to save all supported file types from the  
workflow to a specified location in a Windows file system or  
document repository.  
You can also use Save to direct or “branch” a job to other  
workflows by designating a hot folder as the Save location.  
JDF Export  
Creates a JDF ticket and exports a PDF and JDF ticket to a  
specified location in a Windows file system or document  
repository. You have the option to export the JDF with  
changes made by the external process nodes.  
The output file of a JDF export task can be re-imported and  
re-run by dropping it into a hot folder associated with an  
appropriate workflow. The files associated with the JDF  
must exist in the same location as the original job.  
Conditional  
Conditional branching provides an added level of logic to a  
workflow, allowing it to examine the properties of submitted  
jobs, and then act accordingly without human intervention.  
You can add one or more conditional branches to a  
workflow, each with one or more user-designated  
conditions that specify the desired attributes or properties of  
the submitted jobs.  
2-16  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Table 2-6. Workflow Builder Insert menu and workflow process icons  
Insert Menu  
Options  
Workflow  
Process Icon  
Description  
External  
Process  
(only an  
External Processes enable the use of third party workflow  
components. The processes are added and configured in  
Workflow Job Manager.  
option if one is  
set up)  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Customizing a workflow process name  
The ability to change a process name is useful when multiple  
instances of a process exist in a workflow. The new name displays  
beneath the workflow icon and in the process settings window,  
along with the process name. Follow these guidelines:  
Each process in a workflow must have a unique name.  
The name cannot have more than 60 characters.  
You cannot use the following characters: \, /, :, *, ?, “, <, >, or |.  
To customize a workflow process name  
To customize the process name  
1. In Workflow Builder, ensure the workflow is disabled.  
2. Double-click the process name below the desired workflow  
node. The name highlights  
3. Type a new name.  
NOTE: You can also right-click a process, select [Rename], and  
type a new name.  
4. Select [Enter].  
5. Save and enable the workflow to make the change effective in  
Workflow Job Manager and Workflow Submission Client.  
2-18  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
The Help menu  
The Workflow Builder Help menu contains the following options:  
Table 2-7. The Workflow Builder Help menu  
Help Menu Option  
Description  
Help Topics...  
Displays the Help application to allow you to  
list the Help topics for Workflow Builder.  
About Workflow  
Builder...  
Displays program, copyright and version  
information for Workflow Builder.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Workflow Builder toolbars  
The Workflow Builder toolbars provide commands for creating and  
modifying workflows.  
See also:  
Workflows toolbar  
The Workflows toolbar contains the following options:  
Table 2-8. Workflows toolbar  
Toolbar Option  
Toolbar Icon  
Description  
New  
Adds a new workflow to the list. Provides a cursor  
for editing the workflow name. A Start icon is  
displayed in the workspace.  
Save  
Saves changes to the workflow that is currently  
open for modification.  
Enable/Disable  
Enable: Allows a job to be submitted to the  
selected workflow. Enabled workflows are  
displayed in the Workflow Submission Client  
window. Enable also auto-saves the workflow.  
Disable: Prevents jobs from being submitted to the  
workflow. Disabled workflows are not visible or  
available via the Workflow Submission Client.  
Duplicate  
Delete  
Adds a copy of the selected workflow to the list;  
provides a cursor for editing the workflow name.  
The user must select <Enter> in order to complete  
the duplication operation.  
Deletes the selected workflow with a confirmation  
dialog.  
2-20  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
Workspace toolbar  
The Workspace toolbar allows you perform the following functions  
on a selected workflow process step.  
Table 2-9. Workspace Toolbar  
Toolbar Option  
Toolbar Icon  
Description  
Cut  
Deletes and stores the selected process and  
its properties for pasting into the same  
workflow.  
Copy  
Stores the selected process and its properties  
for pasting elsewhere in the same workflow.  
Paste  
Pastes a process that has been copied.  
Deletes the selected process.  
Delete Process  
Settings  
Displays the settings dialog for a selected  
process.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Building workflows  
You can create Workflows from scratch or by duplicating, and then  
modifying, an existing workflow. To build or modify a workflow,  
you perform the following basic steps:  
Drag and drop process icons into the workspace. Processes  
move from left to right in the workflow.  
Configure the process settings, as needed, to meet the  
requirements of the workflow.  
Save and enable the workflow.  
NOTE: All workflows are disabled after an upgrade or migration. A  
pop-up message displays if you try to enable a workflow that  
requires additional configuration. Complete the configuration, and  
then enable the workflow.  
Rules for building workflows  
Apply the following rules when you sequence workflow process  
steps in the workspace:  
Input is the first step in any workflow. Input is automatically  
displayed in the workspace when you begin a new workflow.  
If Convert exists in a workflow, it must precede the following  
processes:  
Join  
PDF Optimize  
Preflight  
Impose  
Bates Numbering  
Page Numbering  
Watermarks  
Rotate Pages  
Flip Pages  
Print  
Barcodes  
Pressmarks  
2-22  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Builder  
If Join exists in a workflow, it must precede the following  
processes:  
Preflight  
Color Manage  
Impose  
Bates Numbering  
Page Numbering  
Watermarks  
Rotate Pages  
Flip Pages  
Print  
Barcodes  
Pressmarks  
Optimize  
Building a new workflow  
To build a new workflow, drag and drop process icons into the  
workspace, configure the process settings to meet the workflow  
requirements, and then save and enable the workflow.  
To build a new workflow  
1. Launch Workflow Builder.  
2. In the Workflows toolbar, select [New]. A new workflow is  
added to the list. A highlighted name cell is provided for  
editing.  
3. Type a workflow name in the cell, and select <Enter>. An  
Input icon displays in the Workspace.  
4. Select the desired process from the Workflow Process Options  
area, and drag and drop the process into the workflow  
workspace into the desired position. A Gray placeholder  
indicates where a process can be placed. Links automatically  
display between processes.  
You can also use the Insert menu to add a process. The  
process is inserted after the selected process in the workflow.  
5. If necessary, configure the process settings.  
6. Select [Save] and [Enable].  
NOTE: A workflow must be enabled before it can accept new jobs  
for processing.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Duplicating and modifying an existing workflow  
Instead of creating a workflow from scratch, determine if an  
existing workflow has the process steps and process settings that  
approximate your needs. Then copy the existing workflow, add or  
delete process steps, change the properties of a process step, or  
otherwise modify the workflow.  
To duplicate and modify an existing workflow  
NOTE: To modify a workflow, it must first be disabled and all jobs  
received for processing in the workflow must be completed.  
1. In Workflow Builder, select a workflow from the list.  
2. Select [Duplicate] in the Workflows toolbar.  
3. Type a new workflow name in the cell, and select <Enter>.  
The new workflow displays in the workspace.  
4. Select from the following:  
a. To delete a process: Select a process step, and select  
[Delete] in the Workspace toolbar to remove the step from  
the workflow.  
b. To add a process: Select a process step from the  
Workflow Process Options area, and drag and drop it into  
the workflow. Repeat to add more processes. If necessary,  
reconfigure the process steps.  
5. Select [File: Save] to save the workflow, or select [Enable] to  
enable and auto-save the workflow.  
NOTE: After you edit a workflow, it must be enabled to accept new  
jobs.  
2-24  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Enabling a workflow  
A workflow is disabled by default. It must be enabled before it can  
accept new jobs for processing.  
“Enabled Busy” is the status of an enabled workflow that is  
processing a job. The workflow is not available for editing.  
NOTE: In Workflow Builder, all options in the node dialogs are  
grayed and cannot be edited when a workflow is enabled.  
To enable a workflow  
1. In Workflow Builder, select a disabled workflow from the list.  
2. Select [Enable] from the Workflows toolbar.  
NOTE: If changes are made to a workflow, it must be saved  
before can be enabled.  
Disabling a workflow  
A disabled workflow cannot accept new jobs for processing.  
“Disabled Busy” is the status of a disabled workflow that is waiting  
for jobs to finish processing. Once the jobs are completed, the  
status changes to “Disabled” and the workflow is available for  
editing.  
To disable a workflow  
1. In Workflow Builder, select an enabled workflow from the list.  
2. Select [Disable] from the Workflows toolbar. The workflow is  
disabled.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Builder  
Deleting a workflow  
NOTE: To delete a workflow, the workflow must first be disabled,  
and all jobs received for processing in the workflow must be  
completed.  
To delete a workflow  
1. In Workflow Builder, select a workflow in the list.  
2. In the Workflows toolbar, select [Delete]. A confirmation  
message displays.  
3. Select [Yes] to delete the workflow.  
Editing workflow properties  
The Workflow Properties dialog allows you to change the workflow  
name and description that appear in the list area. In the  
Description field, you may want to include notes regarding when to  
use a particular workflow.  
To edit workflow properties  
1. In Workflow Builder, select a workflow from the list.  
2. Double-click on the workflow to display the Workflow  
Properties dialog.  
3. In the Name field, type a workflow name.  
4. In the Description field, type a workflow description.  
5. To enable the workflow, select “Enable submission to this  
workflow.”  
6. Select [OK] to save the changes and close the dialog.  
2-26  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Builder  
Creating fail branches  
You may also add fail branches -- contingency workflow steps for  
fail conditions. For example, after a Preflight process, you might  
want to add a fail branch that contains the following:  
A Notify process that contains Preflight results.  
A Review process, to check or edit the document.  
The workflow defaults to having no fail branches open. You can  
open a branch by clicking on the “plus” icon and collapse the  
branch by clicking on the “minus” icon. Only one branch may be  
open at a time. If you open another branch, the branch that is  
currently open automatically closes.  
To create a fail branch  
1. Select the desired fail branch process and drag it downward,  
after the desired process in a workflow.  
2. Drag the process into the gray space holder that appears after  
the red arrow.  
NOTE: You can also place a fail branch after a process step as  
follows: Select, and then [Copy] a process, point to the desired  
position in the workflow, and select [Paste as Fail Branch] from  
the Edit menu.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Exporting workflows  
The Process Manager export/import workflow function provides  
workflow portability and a method for backing up and restoring  
workflows.  
To import a workflow, you must first generate an .xml workflow file  
by selecting a workflow and exporting it to the desired folder  
location. The .xml file can then be imported into Workflow Builder  
on the same Process Manager server or imported into Workflow  
Builder on a second Process Manage server.  
At the conclusion of the export process, the status of workflow  
nodes is listed and the operator is notified if actions are required to  
fully enable the exported workflows.  
The Export Workflow dialog displays after you select the file to  
export.  
Status text: Status text displays above the upper and lower tables  
and changes to reflect the on-going or completed status of the  
export process.  
In the Export Workflow dialog, the upper table shows the export  
status of each workflow. The lower table shows the status of  
nodes of the workflow selected in the upper table.  
To export a workflow  
1. In Workflow Builder, select a workflow or multiple workflows.  
2. Select [File: Export].  
3. In the File name window of the initial Export Workflow dialog,  
type a new name, if desired.  
4. To establish an export location, select [Browse].  
5. In the Browse For Folder dialog, do one of the following:  
Select a folder. Select [OK].  
Select [Make New Folder]. Name the folder, and select  
[OK].  
2-28  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
6. In the Export Workflow dialog, select [OK]. A new Export  
Workflow dialog displays. The blue process bar cycles until the  
export process is complete.  
7. Select a workflow and review the status of each workflow  
node.  
The Workflows Exported table lists the workflow(s) in the  
selected workflow file.  
The Export Action Summary displays the required actions,  
if any, for nodes of the workflow selected in the upper  
description of status icons.  
8. Take the action required, if any, for each workflow node.  
9. Select [Done].  
NOTE: A .wfc folder displays in the export save location, along  
the .xml file. It contains configuration files, profiles and other  
workflow information to enable workflow restoration during  
import.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Importing workflows  
The Process Manager export/import workflow function provides  
workflow portability and a method for backing up and restoring  
workflows.  
To import a workflow, you must first generate an .xml workflow file  
by selecting a workflow and exporting it to the desired folder  
location. The .xml file can then be imported into Workflow Builder  
on the same Process Manager server or imported into Workflow  
Builder on a second Process Manager server.  
The workflow is fully restored, including any referenced  
directories, hot folders, and profiles that were deleted after the  
workflow was exported. At the conclusion of the import process,  
the status of workflow nodes is listed and the operator is notified if  
actions are required to fully enable the imported workflows.  
The Import Workflow dialog displays after you select the file to  
import.  
Status text: Status text displays above the upper and lower tables  
and changes to reflect the on-going or completed status of the  
import process.  
The upper table shows the import status of each workflow. The  
lower table shows the status of nodes of the workflow selected in  
the upper table.  
To import a workflow  
NOTE 1:Only .xml files can be selected.  
NOTE 2:If the .xml file is incorrectly formatted, an error message  
similar to this displays: “The file [complete path] does not contain  
readable workflow data.”  
NOTE 3:If the .xml file contains workflows of the same names, the  
following message displays: “Cannot import the following  
workflows [workflow names]. Existing workflows of the same  
name already exist. Please rename or delete the existing  
workflows first.” Names are not case-sensitive: “Newsletter  
Workflow” is the same as “newsletter workflow.”  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [File: Import].  
2-30  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
2. In the Open dialog, browse to the desired workflow file and  
select from the following:  
If the .xml file contains one workflow, in the Open dialog,  
select the workflow and select [Open].  
If the .xml file contains more than one workflow, it opens  
an initial Import Workflow dialog, which allows you to  
selectively import the workflows in the .xml file. Select from  
the following:  
Select [Select all workflows] to import all the  
workflows in the .xml file.  
In the list box, select specific workflows to import.  
NOTE: A .wfc folder displays in the export save location, along  
the .xml file. It contains configuration files, profiles and other  
workflow information to enable workflow restoration during  
import.  
3. In the new Import Workflow dialog, review the status and/or  
action required for each workflow node, and take the  
necessary action.  
The Workflows Imported table lists the workflow(s) in the  
selected workflow file.  
The Import Action Summary displays the nodes of the  
workflow selected in the upper table.  
A check mark in a node means the node imported  
successfully. A check mark in all the nodes results in a  
checkmark for the entire workflow in the upper table.  
4. Take any necessary action(s).  
5. Select [Done]. The imported workflows display in the  
Workflows list.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Import and Export Status Descriptions  
The following table describes the import and export status icons  
and provides a general descripion of actions required.  
Table 2-10.  
Icon  
Indicates  
Action Required  
Successful workflow or node import. A check None  
mark in all nodes results in a checkmark for  
the entire workflow in the upper table.  
Successful workflow or node import but  
attention is required.  
Locate node(s) with this symbol;  
perform required action.  
Failed workflow or node import or export.  
Overrides all other icons.  
Locate node(s) with this symbol;  
note the provided information.  
Ensuring imported workflow compatibility  
Workflows can be successfully imported from one Process  
Manager server system to another Process Manager server if both  
servers have the same software version of Process Manager and  
if all the configurations on the second server are compatible.  
The following items should be checked for compatibility:  
PREPS jobs lists  
Fonts used in Bates Numbering, Page Numbering,  
Watermarks  
2-32  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Configuring process settings  
Workflow process settings are configured after a step is inserted  
into a workflow. Changes to the settings apply only to that  
instance of the step.  
All process settings, except the following, can be configured:  
Join  
Review  
Input  
NOTE: In Workflow Job Manager only, you can open the Input  
dialog and view a list of submitted files.  
To modify the process settings  
Refer to a specific process for a detailed description of the  
settings. In general, do the following:  
1. Select a workflow. The workflow displays in the workspace.  
2. Double-click a process step in the workflow or right-click and  
select [Process Settings...] to open the settings dialog.  
3. Change the process settings as desired.  
4. Select [OK] to save the settings and close the dialog.  
NOTE: For all process settings, the option “Always use these  
settings” has a default of “unchecked,” unless otherwise specified.  
If checked, settings in the dialog override any similar settings in an  
incoming JDF job ticket. The settings appear in the Workflow  
Submission Client controls, but are grayed out and unchangeable.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
About Input  
When you create and name a new workflow and select <Enter>  
an Input node automatically displays at the beginning of the  
workflow.  
In Workflow Builder, the Input node does not have a settings  
dialog. In Workflow Job Manager, you can open the Input settings  
dialog and view a list of the original input files, the file path, file  
size and date modified. Input files can also be viewed via the tool  
tip.  
2-34  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Configuring Automatic Image Enhancement (AIE) settings  
Automatic Image Enhancement allows the application of a range  
of image processing operations that optimize the sharpness, color  
balance, saturation, exposure, noise reduction and contrast of  
TIFF, JPEG, and BMP images, whether standalone, or embedded  
in a PDF. AIE also supports redeye removal for humans and  
shadow detail enhancement. The AIE feature works for only color  
and grayscale images.  
To configure Image Enhance settings  
1. To access the Automatic Image Enhancement Settings,  
double-click the AIE step in a workflow.  
2. In the Enhance Files - [node name] dialog, select from the  
following options:  
NOTE: You must select the Contrast option to enable Shadow  
Detail.  
[Contrast] to apply the selected contrast level  
enhancements to incoming jobs. Choose from:  
Off: To disable the option.  
Low: For an image with less contrast.  
Normal: Default; for an image with normal contrast.  
High: For an image with higher contrast.  
Saturation to apply the selected color saturation  
enhancements to incoming jobs. Choose from:  
Off: To disable the option.  
Low: For a less colorful image.  
Normal: Default; for an image with normal color  
saturation.  
High: For a more colorful image.  
Sharpness to apply the selected image sharpness  
enhancements to incoming jobs. Choose from:  
Off: To disable the option.  
Low: For a less sharp image.  
Normal: Default; for a normally sharp image.  
High: For a sharper image.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Exposure to apply the selected exposure enhancements  
to incoming jobs. Choose from:  
Off: To disable the option.  
Darker: For a darker image  
Normal: Default; for a normally enhanced image.  
Lighter: For a light image.  
Color Balance to apply normal color balance  
enhancements to incoming jobs. Choose from:  
Off: To disable the option.  
On: Default; to enable the option.  
Noise Reduction to apply normal IE noise reduction  
enhancements to incoming jobs.  
Off: To disable the option.  
Low: For less noise reduction.  
Normal: Default; for moderate noise reduction.  
High: For greater noise reduction.  
Red Eye Reduction to remove the red eye defect from  
incoming jobs. For human red eye only. Choose from:  
Off: Default; to disable the option.  
On: To enable the option.  
Shadow Detail to enhance dark areas of the image in  
incoming jobs. Choose from:  
NOTE: You must select the Contrast option to enable Shadow  
Detail.  
Off: To disable the option.  
On: Default; to enable the option.  
3. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
2-36  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
AIE and DocuSP  
If you include the AIE process in a FreeFlow Process Manager  
workflow and submit the job to a DocuSP 5.1 or a Xerox FreeFlow  
Print Server 6.0, ensure that you submit it to a queue for which  
AIE is not enabled.  
If you have the option of performing the AIE processing in either  
FreeFlow Process Manager or in the current DocuSP 5.1 or Xerox  
FreeFlow Print Server 6.0, for reasons of flexibility and  
performance, it is recommended that you do so in FreeFlow  
Process Manager, rather than in DocuSP 5.1 or Xerox FreeFlow  
Print Server 6.0.  
Limitations for AIE  
AIE can be applied only to raster image files such as TIFFs,  
JPEGs, and BMPs. It also supports those files if they are  
embedded in PDFs.  
The image quality improvement for BMPs may be minimal.  
AIE red eye reduction applies only to photographs of humans,  
and not to photographs of animals.  
The Exif data that is found in some JPEG files is not currently  
supported by AIE and will result in the loss of resolution  
information.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Configuring Convert settings  
General tab: Process Manager automates the processing of PDF  
documents. The Convert process step enables Microsoft Word  
Microsoft Excel, Microsoft PowerPoint, Microsoft Publisher, Adobe  
InDesign, Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Photoshop, JPG, JPEG, BMP,  
TIFF, TIFF-IT, TIF, PS, VPC, QXD, QXP, RDO, and EPS  
document types to be converted to a PDF document for  
submission to Process Manager workflows.  
You can select from various job options to generate optimal PDFs  
for Microsoft Office (including Microsoft Office 2007) or PS files.  
The job options include the basic Adobe Acrobat Distiller set with  
the addition of various Xerox-specific job options, including  
DocuColor iGen3. You can also create custom job options in  
Adobe Acrobat Distiller for use in Process Manager.  
The default job option that displays in Process Manager is  
selected in Adobe Acrobat Distiller.  
The [Flatten submitted PDF files for printing] option allows you  
to re-process PDF files with known printing problems. “Flattening”  
converts a PDF file to PostScript, and then converts it back to a  
PDF file. This feature may result in a loss of features and image  
degradation, including:  
Flattening of transparency.  
Loss of some interactive features such as thumbnails,  
bookmarks, article threads, logical structure and trapping  
information.  
Loss of functionality of other interactive features such as  
forms, hyperlinks, JavaScript.  
Loss of some annotations such as comments, embedded files,  
embedded media such as video/audio, and references to  
external files or media.  
Limitations for Flatten This feature potentially requires a large  
amount of disk space for creating both the intermediate PostScript  
and the flattened PDF file.The conversion will fail if the disk space  
is insufficient.  
2-38  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Manual Conversion tab: Adobe Creative Suite and QuarkXPress  
files must be manually converted to PDFs before they can be  
processed in a workflow. To do this:  
Set up a working directory via the Convert Settings dialog.  
Files are held in the directory until they are manually  
converted.  
Set up an email notification address via the Convert Settings  
dialog. This allows you to send an e-mail message to indicate  
that a Adobe Creative Suite or QuarkXPress document is  
waiting to be converted to PDF. A message will be sent for  
each document processed.  
Submit Adobe Creative Suite or QuarkXPress files via  
Workflow Submission Client to a workflow with a Convert  
node. Files are sent to the appropriate working directory; an  
email notification is sent.  
Manually convert the files to PDF via Adobe Creative Suite or  
QuarkXPress, when the workflow is stopped at the Convert  
step in Workflow Job Manager. Place the converted files in the  
appropriate working directory to continue workflow processing.  
NOTE: You are solely responsible for obtaining all appropriate  
licenses from Adobe Creative Suite and QuarkXPress and their  
licensors and for maintaining full compliance with those licenses.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
To configure Convert settings  
1. (Optional) To ensure that Process Manager displays the  
desired Adobe Acrobat Distiller default job option, select  
[Start: Programs: Acrobat Distiller] and choose a profile  
from the Default Settings drop box.  
2. To access the Convert Settings dialog in Workflow Builder,  
double-click the Convert step in a workflow.  
3. Select [Flatten submitted PDF files for printing] to re-  
process PDF files with known printing problems. This option  
may result in a loss of features and image degradation.  
4. In the “Select the job options that submitters can choose from”  
text box, select the desired job options. The job options will  
populate the “Select the default job option” drop box.  
5. In the “Select the default job option” drop box, select a default  
job option.  
6. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
NOTE: When “Always use these settings” is selected, it locks in  
the default job option as the conversion type.  
7. Select [OK] to accept changes and close the window.  
2-40  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
To set up a working directory  
1. To access the Convert Settings dialog in Workflow Builder,  
double-click the Convert step in a workflow.  
2. Select the Manual Conversion tab.  
3. Select either [Enable manual QuarkXPress file (*.QXP,  
*.QXD) conversion.] or [Enable manual Adobe Creative  
Suite file (*.INDD, *.AI, *PSD) conversion.] to save files to  
the working directory for manual conversion to PDF. After  
conversion, files are saved to the working directory using the  
given file name.  
4. To set up a Working Directory in which to save and convert the  
files to PDF, select [Browse]. Perform one of the following:  
NOTE: You may be prompted for a login and password if you  
attempt to access a mapped location.  
NOTE: If you are using hot folders to support other FreeFlow  
Process Manager features, such as job submission and third  
party external processes, refer to the topic Limitations when  
In the Browse For Folder dialog, navigate to the desired  
folder, and select [OK].  
Select Make New Folder, name the folder, and select [OK].  
5. Enter an address in the Email Notification Address text box.  
The recipient will be automatically notified that a document is  
waiting to be manually converted to a PDF.  
6. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Workflow Submission Client controls but will be grayed out  
and unchangeable.  
7. Select [OK].  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Unlimited User Conversion option  
An Unlimited User Conversion option is available for Process  
Manager. If you are upgrading from previous versions of Process  
Manager, you will remain as no “Unlimited User Conversion”  
installed unless you purchase this option.  
The Unlimited User Conversion option allows:  
Unlimited high resolution generation and authoring.  
The conversion of all supported document types to PDF when  
a hot folder is shared or is on a mapped drive.  
The following conditions apply if the Unlimited User Conversion  
option is not installed:  
Reprint of a FreeFlow 5.0 saved and password encrypted  
job: If a reprint is requested of a saved job, the job is  
decrypted and processed for Print. The job is not re-encrypted  
during Save.  
100 User Conversion This optional component allows a  
maximumm of one hundred users to submit applications for  
PDF conversion for all suppported document types.  
See also:  
PDF files created through the conversion process and  
saved by Save and JDF Export nodes: These files will be  
password- protected against “Open.” This applies to PDF files  
saved in both the Windows file system and the repository  
system.  
A password is assigned by Process Manager and known  
only by Process Manager.  
Acrobat and other FreeFlow applications will NOT be able  
to open or process those PDF files.  
If any of the PDF files protected by the Save/JDF Export  
node is selected for input to either Workflow Submission  
Client or a hot folder, Process Manager will apply the  
password and process the PDF files accordingly.  
2-42  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
If the workflow used in this case contains Save or JDF  
Export nodes, the password protection will be reapplied to  
output PDF files.  
If the “Unlimited User Conversion” option is installed and  
those password protected PDF files were selected as  
input, password protection will be permanently removed  
from the PDF files. Review, Notification, Save, and JDF  
Export will all behave normally, as before.  
Working with PDF Files  
Adobe does not support PDF files larger than 2.25 Gb on the  
Windows platform.  
PDF files containing more than 30,000 pages and are not  
supported.  
To process only a range of pages within a PDF file, manually  
edit the file in Adobe Acrobat in the Review step.  
If the input PDF file requires a password to open the PDF file,  
most operations will fail.  
Converting Adobe Illustrator and Adobe InDesign documents  
to PDF  
The third party software packages, Adobe Illustrator and Adobe  
InDesign, must be installed and registered for the PDF conversion  
capability to perform in a FreeFlow system.  
If you encounter problems converting Adobe Illustrator and Adobe  
InDesign documents to PDF, do the following:  
1. Close all instances of Adobe Illustrator or Adobe InDesign that  
are running in the Task Manager.  
2. Invoke Illustrator or InDesign from the Start menu. The “Would  
you like to register now?” dialog appears.  
3. Register, then close the application. Conversion should now  
work properly.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Builder  
About Join  
Join combines -- or concatenates -- multiple PDF files into a single  
PDF file. All the PDF files must exist before you attempt to use the  
Join process.  
When submitting multiple files to a workflow:  
To create a single joined job, Join must be in the workflow.  
To create multiple separate jobs that are processed  
individually, Join should not be in the workflow.  
Join does not have a settings dialog.  
See also:  
Limitations for Join  
Bookmarks, logical structure, internal hyperlinks, and article  
threads within PDF files might not be preserved by the PDF Join  
component.  
Fault handling for Join  
Errors are logged in the Windows Event log and displayed in the  
Job Manager status display area. The following errors cause the  
Join operation to fail:  
If the input PDF file is missing.  
If the input PDF file is invalid.  
If the output PDF file is locked and cannot be overwritten, or if  
the user lacks sufficient security privileges to access the  
destination directory.  
If the input PDF file requires a password to open the PDF or  
does not permit any of the following: content copying and  
extraction, document assembly, or content accessibility.  
2-44  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Builder  
Configuring Optimize settings  
The Optimize process allows you to modify a PDF file to be PDF/X  
compliant, specify how fonts should be embedded, define PDF  
Box settings, configure spot color settings, manage color profiles,  
and configure image quality settings for hairline correction and the  
removal of color trapping layers.  
You can have multiple instances of the Optimize node in a  
workflow. However, there is no conflict checking for multiple  
instances.  
When working with non-PDF documents, the Convert node must  
precede the Optimize node.  
The Optimize Options dialog includes five tabs: General, PDF  
Boxes, Color, Spot Colors, and Image Quality. The availability of  
dialog options varies, depending on whether the [Create a  
document that complies with PDF/X standards] option is  
selected, for example:  
When compliance is selected, font embedding is automatically  
set to ON, and output compliance error handling is available.  
When compliance is not selected, font embedding is  
automatically set to OFF; Color Management is enabled, and  
independent use of the PDF Box is enabled.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
To configure the General Optimize settings  
The General tab allows you to select a Settings File, define  
compliance criteria, designate font embedding options, and  
optimize for fast web viewing.  
1. Double-click the Optimize step in a workflow.  
2. In the “Settings File” area, select from the following to load a  
settings file:  
pdfx-1a2001.xml (pre-installed settings file)  
pdfx-1a2003.xml (pre-installed settings file)  
NOTE: If created, other user-defined settings files are also  
displayed.  
3. To save the options you have selected in the Optimize node  
as a custom settings file, and to display the file as an option in  
the Settings File drop box, select [Save As...] to open the  
Save Settings File dialog. For more information, see To save  
4. To remove a settings file from the list, select the file in the drop  
box, and then select [Delete].  
5. In the “Compliance” area, mark the check box for [Create a  
document that complies with PDF/X standards] and select  
from the following options:  
PDFX-1a 2001  
PDFX-1a 2003  
For more information, see Description of PDF/X-1a Standards.  
6. In the “When a PDF/X compliant document cannot be created”  
area, select from the following options:  
[Ignore] to disregard errors and move the job to the next  
workflow process.  
[Warn and continue] to note errors in the error log for the  
current job and move the file to the next workflow node.  
[Cancel job] to note errors in the error log for the current  
job and to halt the job. A fail message displays for the  
Optimize PDF node in Workflow Job Manager.  
2-46  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
7. In the “Fonts” area, select from the following:  
[Embed Fonts] Selected by default and grayed out when  
compliance is selected.  
[Embed as subset] to minimize the document file size.  
Select [Embed all fonts] to enable future text editing. If a  
font has been previously subset embedded, it will be fully  
embeddded. This option increases the file size.  
NOTE: The font family must be loaded on the PC. Only fonts  
with the appropriate permission bits will be embedded.  
8. In the “When an error occurs embedding the fonts” area,  
select from the following:  
[Ignore] to disregard errors and move the job to the  
next workflow process.  
[Warn and continue] to note errors in the error log for  
the current job and move the file to the next workflow  
node.  
[Cancel job] to note errors in the error log for the  
current job and to halt the job. A fail message displays  
for the Optimize PDF node in Workflow Job Manager.  
9. In the Fast Web Viewing area, mark the check box for  
[Optimize the document for fast web view] to enable fast  
page-at-a-time downloading from web servers.  
10. Select [Show job submitter the settings file name only.  
Settings details will be hidden] to display only the Settiings  
File drop box to job submitters. All other dialog features are  
hidden.  
11. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Workflow Submission Client controls but will be grayed out  
and unchangeable.  
12. Select [OK] to accept the changes or select another tab and  
continue configuring.  
To save the Settings File as  
The Save Settings File dialog allows you to save the current  
settings of the Optimize node. For more infomation about the  
1. In the Optimize Options dialog General Tab, select [Save  
As...].  
2. In the File Name text box, enter a new file name.  
3. Select [Save].  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
To configure the PDF Boxes settings  
The PDF Boxes tab allows you to define PDF Box settings. For a  
description of the PDF boxes, see PDF Box Descriptions.  
The availability of dialog options varies, depending on whether the  
[Create a document that complies with PDF/X standards]  
option is selected in the General tab.  
1. Double-click the Optimize step in a workflow and select the  
PDF Boxes tab.  
2. Mark the check box for [Set crop box to media box].  
If a PDF document has a crop box, it is replaced with one  
the size of the media box.  
If the PDF document does not have a crop box, one is  
generated and set to the size of the media box.  
3. In the “When both trim box and art box are missing” drop box,  
select from the following:  
[Set trim box to media box and offset inwards by:]  
Select or type a value for each option: [Left], [Right],  
[Top], and [Bottom].  
[Report an error] to register an error in the error log.  
NOTE: Depending on the error handling specified in the  
General tab in the Compliance area, the job may or may not  
fail.  
[Ignore] to disregard errors and move the job to the next  
workflow process.  
4. In the “When bleed box is missing” drop box, select from the  
following:  
[Set bleed box to media box].  
[Set bleed box to trim box and enlarge by:]  
Select or type a value for each option: [Left], [Right],  
[Top], and [Bottom].  
[Ignore] to disregard errors and move the job to the next  
workflow process.  
2-48  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
5. Select [Show job submitter the settings file name only.  
Settings details will be hidden] to display only the Settiings  
File drop box to job submitters. All other dialog features are  
hidden.  
6. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Workflow Submission Client controls but will be grayed out  
and unchangeable.  
7. Select [OK] to accept the changes or select another tab and  
continue configuring.  
To configure the Color settings  
The Color tab allows you to select the output color space, source  
color space, define the appropriate action when an error occurs,  
and select the desired transparency.  
The availability of options varies, depending on whether the  
[Create a document that complies with PDF/X standards]  
option is selected in the General tab.  
See also:  
1. Double-click the Optimize step in a workflow and select the  
Color tab.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
2. In the Output Color Space area, define the desired output  
color space by selecting from the following options:  
In the [Change all colors in document] drop box, select  
from the following:  
Convert colors to gray (alway available)  
Convert colors to CMYK (alway available)  
The following options are available only if [Create a  
document that complies with PDF/X standards] is not  
selected on the General tab:  
Don’t change colors -- to gray out the Source Color  
Space options; prevent color changes in the document  
Manage Color profiles -- to enable color  
management. This enables the “Don’t change ICC  
profiles for [xx]” option in the CMYK, RGB and Gray  
drop boxes in the Profiles to use section. Enables  
“Treat managed [xx] as.”  
Convert colors to RGB  
NOTE: The Color Manage node from earlier versions of  
FreeFlow Process Manager is replaced by the Manage Colors  
profiles option. For more information about managing color  
profiles, see Managing Color profiles.  
In the [ICC profile] drop box, select the desired profile. If  
you must import a profile to your PC, see To import an ICC  
NOTE: You must own the rights to use the ICC profiles  
accessed by FreeFlow Process Manager.  
3. If required, mark the check box for [Use Output Intent, if  
present, for Source Color Space]. Select this option to allow  
the document’s output intent to override the designated source  
color space profile.  
2-50  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
4. In the Source Color Space area, the following information  
applies to the CMYK, RGB, and Gray drop box options:  
Treat untagged [CMYK, RGB, or Gray] as: Assigns the  
selected ICC profile to all non-profiled [CMYK, RGB, or  
Gray] objects.  
Treat managed [CMYK, RGB, or Gray] as: Available  
when “Manage Color Profiles” is selected in the “Change  
all colors in document” area. Assigns the selected ICC  
profile to all profiled [CMYK, RGB, or Gray] objects.  
Treat all [CMYK, RGB, or Gray] as: Assigns the selected  
ICC profile to both non-profiled and profiled [CMYK, RGB,  
or Gray] objects.  
Don’t change ICC profiles for [CMYK, RGB, or Gray]:  
Available with “Manage Color Profiles” selection. Grays out  
the [CMYK, RGB, or Gray] profile. Preserves the original  
profile of [CMYK, RGB, or Gray] objects within the  
document.  
Select the desired option from the following Source Color  
Space area drop boxes:  
[CMYK]  
[CMYK ICC Profile]  
[RGB]  
[RGB ICC Profile]  
[Gray]  
[Gray ICC Profile]  
5. In the When a color space error occurs area, select from the  
following options:  
[Ignore] to disregard errors and move the job to the  
next workflow process.  
[Warn and continue] to note errors in the error log for  
the current job and move the file to the next workflow  
node.  
[Cancel job] to note errors in the error log for the  
current job and to halt the job. A fail message displays  
for the Optimize PDF node in Workflow Job Manager.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
6. In the Transparency/Overprint area, select [Rasterize  
transparent/overprint objects] to enable the feature.  
7. Specify the desired Resolution at which to rasterize the  
objects: [150], [300],or [600] dpi.  
8. In the When a transparency error occurs area, select from the  
following options:  
[Ignore] to disregard errors and move the job to the  
next workflow process.  
[Warn and continue] to note errors in the error log for  
the current job and move the file to the next workflow  
node.  
[Cancel job] to note errors in the error log for the  
current job and to halt the job. A fail message displays  
for the Optimize PDF node in Workflow Job Manager.  
9. Select [Show job submitter the settings file name only.  
Settings details will be hidden] to display only the Settiings  
File drop box. All other dialog features are hidden.  
10. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Workflow Submission Client controls but will be grayed out  
and unchangeable.  
11. Select [OK] to accept the changes or select another tab and  
continue configuring.  
Importing a FreeFlow 5.0 workflow with a Color Manage node  
If you import a 5.0 workflow with a Color Manage node into  
FreeFlow Process Manager 6.0, the 5.0 Color Manage icon is  
converted to an Optimize icon and the settings transfer  
automatically to the Optimize settings Color tab.  
2-52  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
To configure the Spot Colors settings  
Spot colors usually designate a fifth housing color, an offset  
printing device that contains a special ink. The Spot Color tab  
allows you to keep spot colors, convert to common CMYK  
standard colors, or to convert to an alternative color space. It  
provides a normalization process with the ability to allow you to  
specify how to treat PANTONE® Color values with C, CV, U, CVC,  
and CVU suffixes.  
1. Double-click the Optimize step in a workflow and select the  
Spot Colors tab.  
2. Mark the check box for [Convert spot colors to process  
colors] to convert Spot Colors to the Output Color Space.  
If no spot colors are defined in the exclusion list, then all spot  
colors in the document will be converted. Objects that contain  
multiple spot colors must have all of their spot colors defined in  
the exclusion list or the objects will be converted to the Output  
Color Space. The exclusion list appears below the text box.  
3. To add a spot color to the exclusion list:  
a. In the “Spot colors not to convert” text box, enter the spot  
color name. Names are case and space insensitive.  
b. Select [Add].  
When an item is selected in the exclusion list, you can change or  
delete the item:  
4. To change the name of a spot color:  
a. Enter a new name in the “Spot colors not to convert” text  
box.  
b. In the exclusion list, select the spot color you wish to  
change.  
c. Select [Change].  
5. To delete a spot color:  
a. In the exclusion list, select a spot color.  
b. Select [Delete].  
6. Mark the radio button for [Set spot color suffix to match  
media type] to convert all suffixes to one of the following  
suffixes:  
[Coated paper] to support PANTONE® coated spot color.  
[Uncoated paper] to support PANTONE® uncoated spot  
color.  
[Matte paper] to support PANTONE® matte spot color.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
7. Select [Show job submitter the settings file name only.  
Settings details will be hidden] to display only the Settiings  
File drop box to job submitters. All other dialog features are  
hidden.  
8. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings appear in the Workflow  
Submission Client controls but are grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
9. Select [OK] to accept the changes or select another tab and  
continue configuring.  
2-54  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
To configure Image Quality settings  
The Hairline Correction feature thickens stroke lines within a  
document that may be too thin for printing purposes.  
The Remove color trapping layers option allows you to eliminate  
color trap layers from the PDF. Color trap layers are originally  
intended to provide fill between two objects that abut in a  
document but end up printing with white space along the abutting  
borders. Color trap layers solve the issue by printing an  
overlapping border between the abutting objects.  
1. Double-click the Optimize step in a workflow and select the  
Image Quality tab.  
2. Mark the checkbox for [Replace all hairlines narrower than]  
to enable the feature, and select or enter a threshold value.  
Inches: Default is 0. Maximum value is .0625 (1/16th inch).  
Pixels: Default is 0. Maximum value is 75 (1/16th inch on a  
1200 dpi. printer).  
mm: Default is 0.0. Maximum value is 1.5875.  
Points: Default is 0. Maximum value is 4.5.  
3. Select or enter a value to replace anything lower than  
threshold value.  
Inches: Default is 0.01389. Maximum value is .0625 (1/  
16th of an inch).  
Pixels: Default is 16.67. Maximum value is 75 (1/16th of an  
inch on a 1200 dpi. printer) .  
mm: Default is 0.3528. Maximum value is 1.5875.  
Points: Default is 1. Maximum value is 4.5.  
4. Select the desired unit for the hairline correction: [inches],  
[pixels], [mm] or [points].  
5. In the “Color Trapping” area, mark the check box for [Remove  
color trapping layers] to eliminate trap layers from the PDF.  
NOTE: Removal of trap layers is supported for traps created by  
Prinergy, Prinect and Esko Graphics.  
6. Select [Show job submitter the settings file name only.  
Settings details will be hidden] to display only the Settiings  
File drop box to job submitters. All other dialog features are  
hidden.  
7. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Workflow Submission Client controls but will be grayed out  
and unchangeable.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Description of PDF/X-1a Standards  
Table 2-11. Description of PDF/X-1a Standards  
File Type  
PDF/X-1a 2003  
Description  
ISO standard for graphic content exchange. Files can be opened in  
Acrobat 5.0 and Acrobat Reader 5.0 and later. The standard requires  
that:  
All fonts are embedded.  
The appropriate bounding boxes are specified: Media Box,  
Trim Box, or Art Box.  
Color appears as CMYK, spot colors, or both (RGB and LAB  
spaces are not allowed).  
Compliant files must contain describe the output printing  
condition (e.g. SWOP) for which they are prepared.  
The Trap Key is set.  
PDF/X-1a 2001  
Same as above, except files can be opened in Acrobat 4.0 and Acrobat  
Reader 4.0 and later.  
About PDF Boxes  
The following table describes the PDF media box, bleed box, trim  
box and art box.  
Table 2-12. PDF Box Descriptions  
PDF Box  
Description  
Media box  
Page size; contains all the objects of a page, including text and images  
that appear on the page or that bleed or extend off the edge of the  
finished document.  
Media box dimensions are always greater than or equal to the trim box  
dimensions.  
Media box dimensions are always greater than or equal to the bleed  
box dimensions.  
Crop Box  
The crop box represents the region in which the page contents are  
trimmed when displayed or printed. It defines how the page contents  
are placed on the output medium.  
The crop box dimensions are always greater than or equal to the trim,  
art, and bleed box.  
The crop box dimensions are always smaller than or equal to the media  
box.  
2-56  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
Table 2-12. PDF Box Descriptions  
PDF Box  
Bleed box  
Description  
Represents an extended area around the trim box at which contains  
content that will be trimmed during finishing.  
A document that requires a bleed also requires a bleed box.  
The bleed box must be smaller than the media box, and can be the  
same or larger than the trim box.  
Trim box  
Represents the final finished size of the document after printing and  
finishing. A document intended for commercial printing requires a trim  
box.  
The trim box must be smaller than the media box, and can be the same  
as the bleed box.  
Trim marks are nominally placed around the trim box.  
Art box  
Represents an area of the page (for example, a piece of clip art) to be  
positioned when the PDF content is placed in an application, such as a  
page layout program.  
The art box must be smaller than the bleed box.  
Trim and art boxes may have the same dimensions.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Managing Color profiles  
Color Manage allows you to:  
Add CMYK profiles to untagged CMYK content.  
Replace CMYK profiles for tagged content.  
Add RGB profiles to untagged RGB content.  
Replace RGB profiles for tagged RGB content.  
Add gray profiles to untagged gray content.  
Replace gray profiles for tagged gray content.  
Allows you to not change a profile for a specific color space.  
A CMYK, RGB or gray profile is added to untagged content when  
colors need to be transformed or accurately displayed or printed.  
Untagged color spaces (also known as “device” spaces) have an  
ambiguous interpretation; adding a profile resolves the ambiguity  
by providing a specific interpretation of the data.  
CMYK, RGB or gray profiles are replaced for tagged content when  
the original profile—the original specification of how the color  
values should be interpreted—is wrong or has changed. This can  
occur when:  
The original profile is known to be incorrect—for example,  
because of a known error in prior processing.  
The color is being edited, and the output is desired in a  
different color space.  
Only profiles installed on the Windows Operating System are  
visible.  
To import an ICC profile  
1. Navigate to the .icc profile you wish to import.  
2. Right-click profile and select [Install Profile].  
3. The profile is installed in the color directory of your Windows  
system folder. The location of the directory depends on your  
operating system. For example, in Windows 2000, it is often  
found in C:\WinNT\system32\spool\drivers\color.  
2-58  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Ensuring Color Manage workflow consistency between the  
server and a remote client  
Workflows with color management enabled in the Optimize node  
can become inconsistent between a Process Manager server and  
remote client when profiles are uninstalled on the server. Use the  
following procedure to ensure workflow consistency.  
To ensure Color Manage workflow consistency  
1. Disable the Workflow.  
2. Open the Optimize node.  
3. Enable the workflow to reset the profile database.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Configuring Preflight settings  
At minimum, preflight can validate the file and check formatting,  
verify the image format (resolution, color space, and color profile),  
fonts, and verify references to OPI image server images. The  
preflight validation depends on the profile you select. The  
administrator defines preflight profiles using Adobe Acrobat  
Professional’s profile repository and Xerox custom profiles. The  
operator can select a profile to use as the default profile for a  
specific workflow.  
The Xerox FreeFlow Recommended Preflight profile, provided  
with the FreeFlow Process Manager product, includes the  
following checks:  
Font is not embedded  
Image resolution is less than 250 ppi  
Bitmap (1bit monochrome) image resolution is less than 600  
ppi  
Document is damaged and needs repairs  
PDF contains errors or is damaged  
Preflight can also be used to automatically filter and route  
incoming PDF files. This is done by setting up multiple preflight  
nodes as filters at key points in a workflow to check for specific  
conditions. Based on the results, the file is directed to the  
appropriate process or workflow branch.  
See also:  
2-60  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
To generate the preflight profile repository on a clean install  
Preflight profiles do not exist on a clean install. After a clean  
install, do the following to generate the profile repository:  
1. Select [Start: Programs: Adobe Acrobat Professional].  
2. In the Advanced menu, select [Preflight Setup]. This  
generates the profile repository from which you can select  
profiles in the Preflight Settings dialog.  
3. Close Adobe Acrobat Professional.  
To configure Preflight settings  
1. To access the Preflight Settings dialog, double-click the  
Preflight step in a workflow.  
2. In the “Select Preflight profiles that submitters can choose  
from” text box, select the desired profiles. The profiles will  
populate the “Select the default profile” drop box.  
3. In the “Select the default Preflight profile” drop box, select a  
default profile.  
4. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
5. Select [OK] to accept changes and close the window.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Using preflight as a filter  
To help alleviate prepress bottlenecks, you can set up preflight  
nodes at various points in a workflow to automatically check for  
specific conditions, for example:  
Color or black and white  
Specific page size  
Portrait or landscape orientation  
Depending on whether the files pass or fail the check, they are  
automatically directed to the appropriate workflow node or branch.  
Table 2-13. Examples: Using preflight as a filter  
To check for...  
Pass/Fail results  
Embedded fonts, legitimate fonts, If passes, then go to next node.  
and other basic preflight  
requirements.  
If fails, then check the preflight  
report, fix, and resubmit.  
Purpose: To perform initial  
sorting of submitted customer  
files.  
Pages 12 x 18 or larger  
If passes, then send to printer A,  
which handles large format jobs.  
Purpose: To sort files with large  
page dimensions from those with  
small dimensions.  
If fails, then send to the fail  
branch for printer B, which  
handles small format jobs.  
Color or black and white files  
If color, the file passes; send it to  
Color Manage, and then to the  
color printer A.  
Purpose: To sort files into black  
and white and color.  
If b&w, the file fails; send it to the  
fail branch for b&w printer B.  
Tips for using Preflight as a filter  
Begin the workflow with a general preflight profile that checks  
for legitimate fonts and/or other basic requirements.  
Continue filtering with one-rule profiles that check for specific  
conditions.  
Use as many one-rule preflight profiles as necessary to filter  
and direct the jobs to the appropriate node or workflow branch.  
2-62  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Upgrading legacy workflows that contain Job Level Edit nodes  
In previous versions of FreeFlow Process Manager (2.0 through  
4.0), all job level edit functions (for example, watermarks, page  
numbering, page rotation) were available via a single Job Level  
Edit dialog. In version 6.0, you must add an individual process  
step to the workflow for each function. Legacy workflows that  
contain Job Level Edit processes will perform as they did in earlier  
versions, but you will not be able to edit them. To use the version  
6.0 job level edit functions, save the existing Job Level Edit  
workflow, and it will be converted into a series of individual,  
Watermark, Bates Numbering, Page Numbering, Rotate and Flip  
nodes, as appropriate.  
Limitations for job level edits  
The font specified for Bates numbering, page numbering and/or  
textual watermarks must be loaded on the system running the  
automated PDF editing module.  
Fault handling for job level edits  
Errors are logged in the Windows Event log and display in the Job  
Manager status display area. The following errors cause the Job  
Level Edit operation to fail:  
If the input PDF file is missing.  
If the input PDF file is invalid.  
If the output PDF file is locked and cannot be overwritten, or if  
the user lacks sufficient security privileges to access the  
destination directory.  
If the input PDF file requires a password to open the PDF or  
does not permit any of the following: content copying and  
extraction, document assembly, or content accessibility.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Builder  
Adding watermarks  
Up to 1000 user-configured text and image watermarks can be set  
up and applied to each page of an input PDF file. The List box  
shows watermarks that have been configured. The attributes for a  
selected watermark are displayed in the Description area. Image  
and text icons to the left of each watermark indicate the watermark  
type.  
Dialog options include:  
New: Opens the New Text Watermark dialog or New Image  
Watermark dialog, in which you can create a new watermark.  
Modify: Opens the Modify Text Watermark or Modify Image  
Watermark dialog for the selected watermark.  
Duplicate: Copies the selected watermark.  
Delete: Deletes the selected watermark.  
NOTE: All watermarks in the Watermarks list are applied to the  
job and are applied in the order in which they are listed.  
See also:  
2-64  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Setting up or modifying a text watermark  
Text watermarks can consist of multiple lines with hard line  
breaks. They can be created in a variety of font types, sizes and  
colors; can be transparent or opaque, rotated, or variably  
positioned from the document edge; and can appear either  
underneath or on top of the page content.  
To set up or modify a text watermark  
1. Double-click the Watermarks step in a workflow.  
2. Select one of the following:  
Select [New], and then select [Text Watermark] to set up  
a new text watermark.  
Select a watermark from the list, and then select [Modify]  
to change an existing text watermark.  
3. To change the font typeface, select a font from the Font name  
drop box.  
4. To change the font style, select a style from the Font style drop  
box.  
5. To change the font size, select a point size from the Size drop  
box.  
6. Select a color for the watermark from the Color drop box.  
a. To select a color that is not available in the drop box,  
select [Customize...].  
b. Select the desired Hue, Saturation, and Value.  
7. In the text box, enter the desired text. Line breaks are  
accepted.  
NOTE: The text box supports variable data syntax when the  
workflow is submitted from FreeFlow Process Manager MAX,  
Manifest Automation from Xerox. The content of the text  
should be specified as follows: (e.g.”Order Number: $CSV1$ -  
Job ID: $CSV2$”). Variable text is specified by the Order  
Jacket file column number (e.g. $CSV1$). All non-variable  
text, including spaces, will be treated as static text. If the  
workflow is submitted in ways other than via Process Manager  
MAX, variable data text will be ignored.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
8. Select or type the horizontal position from the PDF document  
box: From left, Center, or From right.  
9. Select or type the vertical position from the PDF document  
box: From top, Center, or From bottom.  
10. Select the position relative to Crop Box, Media Box, Bleed  
Box, Trim Box or Art Box.  
11. Select the desired degree of rotation, from 0-359 degrees. The  
icon changes to reflect the selected rotation.  
12. Select a transparency from 0-100. The greater the  
transparency level, the less opaque the watermark.  
13. In the “Apply to pages” area, specify the pages upon which the  
watermark will appear.  
If Page range is selected, enter a text string using  
commas and hyphens. For example, select “1-3, 7, 12-14,  
17” to print bar codes on pages 1 through 3, on page 7, on  
pages 12 through 14, and on page 17.  
NOTE: Various order jacket file variables are supported by  
FreeFlow Process Manager MAX, Manifest Automation from  
Xerox.. You can enter variable data syntax in the page range  
text box. For example, given an Order jacket file (OJF) with  
columns 1, 2, 3, 4 containing page range data “1-3”, “7”, “12-  
14”, “17” respectively, you can enter text “$CSV1$, $CSV2$,  
$CSV3$, $CSV4$” into the page range text box. If OJF column  
contains an invalid page range, the workflow will fail with an  
invalid page range error in Workflow Job Manager. Process  
Manager supports multiple text watermarks, each potentially  
utilizing different Order Jacket variables.  
14. Select [OK].  
15. To preview the watermark placement in the document, select  
[Preview>>]. For more information about the Preview option,  
16. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
The watermark displays in the Watermarks list. Select a  
watermark to display its description to the right.  
2-66  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
17. If desired, select [Move Up] or [Move Down] to move the  
selected watermark up or down in the list, and to define the  
order in which each watermark is layered on the page.  
18. Select from the following:  
[Place all watermarks behind page content] to place the  
watermark underneath the page contents.  
[Place all watermarks in front of page content] to place  
the watermark on top of the page contents.  
NOTE: The setting applies to all image and text watermarks.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Setting up or modifying an image watermark  
Image watermarks can be transparent or opaque, scaled, rotated,  
variably positioned from the document edge and can appear either  
underneath or on top of the page content. Colorization is not  
supported.  
To set up or modify an image watermark  
1. Double-click the Watermarks step in a workflow.  
2. Select one of the following:  
Select [New], and then select [Image Watermark] to set  
up a new image watermark.  
Select a watermark from the list, and then select [Modify]  
to change an existing image watermark.  
3. Enter a file path or select [Browse] to locate a TIFF, JPEG,  
BMP, or PDF image file.  
NOTE 1:The selected image must reside on a local drive.  
NOTE 2:Only page 1 of the PDF is selected.  
a. In the Browse for watermark image file dialog, select a file.  
b. Select [Open]. The dialog closes and the path and file  
name display in the Watermark filename text box.  
4. Select a percentage from 1 to 200 to scale the image.  
5. Select or type the horizontal position from the PDF document  
box: From left, Center, or From right.  
6. Select or type the vertical position from the PDF document  
box: From top, Center, or From bottom  
7. Select the position relative to Crop Box, Media Box, Bleed  
Box, Trim Box or Art Box.  
8. Select the desired degree of rotation, from 0-359 degrees. The  
icon changes to reflect the selected rotation.  
9. Select a transparency from 0-100. The greater the  
transparency level, the less opaque the watermark.  
2-68  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
10. In the “Apply to pages” area, specify the pages upon which the  
watermark will appear.  
If Page range is selected, enter a text string using  
commas and hyphens. For example, select “1-3, 7, 12-14,  
17” to print bar codes on pages 1 through 3, on page 7, on  
pages 12 through 14, and on page 17.  
NOTE: Various order jacket file variables are supported by  
FreeFlow Process Manager MAX, Manifest Automation from  
Xerox. You can enter variable data syntax in the page range  
text box. For example, given an Order jacket file (OJF) with  
columns 1, 2, 3, 4 containing page range data “1-3”, “7”, “12-  
14”, “17” respectively, you can enter text “$CSV1$, $CSV2$,  
$CSV3$, $CSV4$” into the page range text box. If OJF column  
contains an invalid page range, the workflow will fail with an  
invalid page range error in Workflow Job Manager.  
11. To preview the watermark placement in the document, select  
[Preview>>]. For more information about the Preview option,  
12. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
The watermark displays in the Watermarks list. Select a  
watermark to display its description to the right.  
13. If desired, select [Move Up] or [Move Down] to move the  
selected watermark up or down in the list, and to define the  
order in which each watermark is layered on the page.  
14. Select from the following:  
[Place all watermarks behind page content] to place the  
watermark underneath the page contents.  
[Place all watermarks in front of page content] to place  
the watermark on top of the page contents.  
NOTE: The setting applies to all image and text watermarks.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Duplicating or deleting a watermark  
You can duplicate or remove a selected watermark.  
To duplicate or delete a watermark  
1. Double-click the Watermarks step in a workflow.  
2. To duplicate a watertmark:  
Select a watermark from the list.  
Select [New].  
Select [Duplicate] from the drop box.  
3. To delete a watermark:  
Select a watermark from the list.  
Select [Delete] to remove the watermark.  
4. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
See also:  
2-70  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Adding Bates numbers  
Bates numbering can be added to each page of an input PDF file.  
Bates numbering consists of a page number with optional leading  
zeros and an optional fixed text prefix. An optional line of fixed text  
can appear either above or below the bates number.  
To add Bates numbers  
1. Double-click the [Bates Numbering] step in a workflow.  
2. In the Start with area, enter the starting number for the bates  
numbers.  
3. Select whether to enable leading zeros and setting the total  
number of digits.  
4. Select the total number of digits, including leading zeros, from  
1-60.  
5. If you wish to have text appear before the bates numbers,  
select [Include Prefix] and enter the desired text in the text  
box.  
6. If desired, select [Include second line of text] and enter the  
desired text in the associated text box.  
7. Choose whether to position the text above or below the bates  
number.  
8. To change the font typeface, select a typeface from the Font  
drop box.  
9. To change the font style, select a style from the Font style drop  
box.  
10. To change the font size, select a point size from the Size drop  
box.  
11. From the Color drop box, select a color for the prefix and the  
second line of text.  
a. To select a color that is not available in the drop box,  
select [Customize...].  
b. Select the desired Hue, Saturation, and Value.  
12. Select or type the horizontal position from the PDF document  
box: [From left], [Center], or [From right].  
13. Select or type the vertical position from the PDF document  
box: [From top], [Center], or [From bottom].  
14. Select the position relative to [Crop Box], [Media Box],  
[Bleed Box], [Trim Box] or [Art Box].  
15. To preview the Bates number placement in the document,  
select [Preview>>]. For more information about the Preview  
16. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
17. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
Adding page numbers  
Page numbers can be added to each page of a PDF file. Page  
numbers are available in a selection of styles, including 1, 2, 3; I,  
II, III; or i, ii, iii. Options include adding a prefix and/or suffix, and  
selecting font, color, and position.  
To add page numbers  
1. Double-click the [Page Numbering] step in a workflow.  
2. In the Start with area, enter the starting number for the page  
numbers.  
3. Select the desired numbering style from the drop box.  
4. If you want text to appear before the page numbers, select  
[Include prefix], and enter the text in the associated text box.  
5. If you want text to appear after the page numbers, select  
[Include suffix], and enter the text in the associated text box.  
6. To change the font typeface, select a typeface from the Font  
name drop box.  
7. To change the font style, select a style from the Font style drop  
box.  
8. To change the font size, select a point size from the Size drop  
box.  
9. Select a color for the prefix and the suffix from the Color drop  
box.  
a. To select a color that is not available in the drop box,  
select [Customize...].  
b. Select the desired Hue, Saturation, and Value.  
10. Select or type the horizontal position from the PDF document  
box: [From left], [Center], or [From right].  
11. Select or type the vertical position from the PDF document  
box: [From top], [Center], or [From bottom].  
2-72  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
12. Select the position relative to [Crop Box], [Media Box],  
[Bleed Box], [Trim Box] or [Art Box].  
13. To preview the page number placement in the document,  
select [Preview>>]. For more information about the Preview  
14. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
15. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Adding a Barcode  
The Barcode node allows you to add a variety of barcodes to your  
workflows. You can specify the barcode type, font, placement,  
alignment, rotation, frequency, and size.  
You can specify additional features for some bar code types. For  
example:  
Two-digit or 5-digit supplements.The supplement is a second  
barcode, separate from the primary barcode and positioned to  
its right.  
A checksum, for barcode verification, which may be either  
optional or mandatory.  
Start and stop characters that bracket the bar code content.  
A fixed first digit, which you can specify it from a range.  
See also:  
To configure Barcode settings  
NOTE: View the dynamic effect of your selections in the Preview  
window at the bottom of this dialog, or click the [Preview >>]  
button to preview the barcode placement in the document. For  
more information about the Preview option, see Previewing job  
1. To open the Add Barcode dialog, double-click the [Barcode]  
process in a workflow.  
2. In the Barcode tab, specify the barcode symbology from the  
drop box.  
3. In the Options area, select from the following:  
NOTE: Options vary depending on the selected symbology.  
[Include check digits] to enable barcode verification.  
[Include start character] to include a start character in the  
barcode.  
[Include stop character] to include a stop character in the  
barcode.  
2-74  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
4. In the Size area, specify the following:  
Font Size: Select or type the desired “font size.” This is an  
approximation of the width of the narrowest bar in the bar  
code in “mils” (one thousandths of an inch). The Bar  
Codes node does not require you to have bar code fonts  
installed on the FreeFlow system.  
Height: Select or type the desired barcode height.  
NOTE: The size of the human-readable text is not included in  
the requested bar code height. If you specify height = 1 inch,  
the total size of the graphic is one inch plus the height of the  
readable text extending above or below the bar code.  
NOTE: Height can be specified in inches or millimeters,  
except for PostNet (Japan) and QR Code because the height  
for those types is determined uniquely to bar width or cell size.  
Horizontal padding: Select or type the desired padding to  
control the amount of white space on either side of the  
barcode.  
Vertical padding: Available for QR Code type only. Select  
or type the desired padding to control the amount of white  
space at the top or the bottom of the barcode.  
5. Select the desired degree of rotation, in increments of 90  
degrees. The icon changes to reflect the selected rotation.  
6. Select or type the horizontal position from the PDF document  
box: [From left], [Center], or [From right].  
7. Select or type the vertical position from the PDF document  
box: [From top], [Center], or [From bottom].  
8. Select the position relative to [Crop Box], [Media Box],  
[Bleed Box], [Trim Box] or [Art Box].  
NOTE: You can specify offset in inches or in millimeters either  
as positive (inward from the selected box), or negative  
(outward from the selected box) numbers. Default placement  
is Top-Left of the Crop Box, with horizontal and vertical offsets  
(0.0, 0.0).  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
9. In the “Apply to pages” area, specify the pages upon which the  
barcode will appear.  
If Page range is selected, enter a text string using  
commas and hyphens. For example, select “1-3, 7, 12-14,  
17” to print bar codes on pages 1 through 3, on page 7, on  
pages 12 through 14, and on page 17.  
NOTE: Various order jacket file variables are supported by  
FreeFlow Process Manager MAX, Manifest Automation from  
Xerox.. You can enter variable data syntax in the page range  
text box. For example, given an Order jacket file (OJF) with  
columns 1, 2, 3, 4 containing page range data “1-3”, “7”, “12-  
14”, “17” respectively, you can enter text “$CSV1$, $CSV2$,  
$CSV3$, $CSV4$” into the page range text box. If OJF column  
contains an invalid page range, the workflow will fail with an  
invalid page range error in Workflow Job Manager.  
10. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
11. Select [OK] to accept the changes or select another tab to  
continue configuring.  
2-76  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
To configure the barcode readable text  
The Readable Text tab allows you to specify that the data  
encoded in the bar code prints in a human-readable format. The  
default is disabled.  
NOTE: The size of the human-readable text is not included in the  
requested bar code height. If you specify height = 1 inch, the total  
size of the graphic is one inch plus the height of the readable text  
extending above or below the bar code.  
Readable text is not enabled for the following bar code types:  
Bookland  
ISBN  
Postbar (Japan)  
QR Code (FX market)  
The specifications, below, are not available for all barcode types.  
NOTE: View the dynamic effect of your selections in the Preview  
window at the bottom of this dialog, or click [Preview>>] to  
preview the barcode placement in the document. For more  
information about the Preview pane option, see Previewing job  
1. To open the Add Barcode dialog, double-click the [Barcode]  
process in a workflow.  
2. In the Readable Text tab, mark the check box for [Include  
human readable text] to enable the feature.  
3. If available, mark the check box for [Include check digits] to  
specify whether checksum character(s) should be shown in  
the human-readable text.  
4. If available, mark the check box for [Split UPC characters] or  
[Shrink UPC Characrters] to specify that the first character  
and/or last character of the human-readable text is split apart  
from the rest of the human-readable text and/or printed in a  
smaller font.  
5. If available, mark the check box for [To include start and  
stop characters] t  
6. Specify whether the text is Opaque (cannot see through text)  
or Transparent (can see-through text).  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
7. Specify the Vertical Placement as either: Place text below  
bars or Place text above bars.  
8. Specify a Horizontal Alignment, either [Left], [Center], or  
[Right].  
9. Select or type the text Vertical offset.  
10. Select or type a Horizontal offset.  
11. From the font drop boxes, specify the font, font style and font  
size.  
12. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
13. Select [OK] to accept the changes or select another tab to  
continue configuring.  
2-78  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
To configure barcode data  
You can specify the data to be encoded as a bar code.  
NOTE: Guidelines for valid characters and total numbers of  
characters are displayed in the center of the dialog.  
NOTE: You can enter data using characters outside of the valid  
character set for a bar code type if those characters are bracketed  
by the start/stop sequences used by variables in FreeFlow  
Process Manager MAX, Manifest Automation by Xerox.  
See also:  
To add or modify text or a data field  
1. To open the Add Barcode dialog, double-click the [Barcode]  
process in a workflow.  
2. Select the Data tab.  
In the “Enter data” area, select [Add]. The Add Data dialog  
displays.  
If you are modifying text or data, select the desired item in  
the display window, and select [Modify]. The Modify Data  
dialog displays.  
3. In the Add Data or Modify Data dialog, to add or modify text,  
select [Text], enter the desired text in the text box, and select  
[Add]. Your selection displays in the lower area of the dialog.  
Notice that the data is concatenated to form one string of data.  
4. To add or modify data, select [Data Field] and select from the  
following variables:  
Job ID  
Job Name  
Sheet In Signature  
Sheet Number  
Sheets Per Signature  
Signature Number  
Total Sheets  
Total Signatures  
NOTE: If the data field contains characters that the barcode  
does not support, the job may fail for invalid data.  
5. To add leading zeroes, mark the check box to enable the  
feature, then select the desired number of digits from the drop  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
box.  
6. Select [Add]. Your selections display in the lower area of the  
dialog.  
7. If adding, select [Done]; if modifying, select [OK].  
See also:  
To manage barcode data  
1. To open the Add Barcode dialog, double-click the [Barcode]  
process in a workflow.  
2. In the Data tab dialog, review your selections in the window.  
As necessary, select from the following:  
To add text or data, select [Add]. Data is concatenated to  
form one string of data. Refer to To add or modify text or a  
To modify text or data, select the text or data and then  
select [Modify]. Refer to To add or modify text or a data  
field.  
To remove text or data, select the desired text or data, and  
then select [Delete].  
To move the selected text or data up or down in the list,  
select [Move Up] or [Move Down].  
3. In the “Variable data options” area, select or type the desired  
Sheets per signature, from 1 to 999. This value is used if the  
Signature Number and Total Signatures variables are  
selected.  
4. In the “When sheets are part of the barcode data” area, select  
from the following to specify a count direction to be used with  
the SheetNumber, SignatureNumber, and SheetInSignature  
variables. A single count direction is applied to all three  
variables.  
[Increments, starting with the first sheet number  
(ascending)] (1 to N)  
[Decrements, starting with the last sheet number  
(descending)] (N to1)  
NOTE: If bar code frequency is set to Even Pages or Odd  
Pages, the Bar Codes node treats the document as duplex,  
and the Sheet Number variable increments for every bar code  
(i.e., not for every PDF page), while the TotalSheets variable is  
half the number of PDF pages. The document is also treated  
as duplex if any of the Signature variables are used.  
2-80  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
5. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
6. Select [OK] to accept the changes or select another tab to  
continue configuring.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Previewing job level edits  
The Preview option allows you to dynamically view content added  
to a PDF document before you commit to the selected settings.  
You can preview the following workflow processes:  
Bates Stamping  
Page Numbering  
Watermarks  
Barcodes  
Pressmarks  
Imposition  
NOTE: The Preview feature does not support Crop, Resize, Flip,  
and Rotate.  
You can preview content on one or more blank pages or on a  
sample PDF document.  
To preview job level edits  
1. Open one of the following processes in a workflow:  
Bates Stamping  
Page Numbering  
Watermarks  
Barcodes  
Imposition  
Pressmarks  
2. Select [Preview >>] to display the preview controls. The  
controls allow you to preview selections, but do not affect the  
output.  
NOTE: In the Imposition settings, mark the checkbox for  
[Preview].  
You can specify a sample PDF document upon which to preview  
the content. Otherwise, the content is displayed on one or more  
blank pages.  
3. Select [Use sample PDF] to use the browse function to  
specify a sample PDF document. A Workflow [Process] dialog  
displays.  
NOTE:  
NOTE: You can also drag and drop a PDF document into the  
Preview window.  
2-82  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
4. Select [Yes] to browse for a sample PDF.  
5. In the Browse for sample PDF dialog, browse select a file.  
6. Select [Open] to choose the file and close the dialog.  
The path and file name display in the text box.  
The file displays in the Preview window.  
Preview page count displays the number of pages in the  
sample PDF document.  
4. If there are multiple pages to preview, use the Page Forward  
and Page Back arrows to navigate. In the Imposition Preview  
pane, right-click and select from [First Sheet], [Previous  
Sheet], [Next Sheet] or [Last Sheet].  
5. Select [Preview page image size] to select a preview page  
size. The content displays on a blank page of the selected  
stock size. The Imposition node supports Auto. The default for  
all other nodes is 8.5 x 11 inches or A4 metric. Select Custom  
to enable Width and Height boxes.  
6. Select [Show Rulers], or in the Imposition Settings dialog,  
select [Show Preview rulers], to turn on or turn off the  
Preview screen rulers.  
7. For the Imposition Preview window only:  
Select [Show corner page numbers] to display the page  
number in all corners of each displayed page.  
For Maxium N-Up jobs, in the Imposition Settings dialog,  
the “Automatic output prognosis” area shows the status of  
the specified job options.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Rotating pages  
Each page in the PDF file can be rotated by 90 degrees clockwise  
or counterclockwise, or by 180 degrees.  
To rotate pages  
1. Double-click the Rotate Pages step in a workflow.  
2. Select from None, Right 90, Left 90, or 180 degrees to turn a  
page from its current position.  
3. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
4. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window, or  
continue setting job level edit options.  
Flipping pages  
Each page in the PDF file can be flipped horizontally or vertically  
to create a mirror image.  
To flip pages  
1. Double-click the Flip Pages step in a workflow. Select from the  
following:  
In the Horizontal area, select [Flip] to flip pages along the  
horizontal axis and create a mirror image.  
In the Vertical area, select [Flip] to flip pages along the  
vertical axis and create a mirror image.  
2. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
3. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
2-84  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
Resizing  
The Resize feature allows you to automatically resize images at  
the document and page level. You can select a specific size, or a  
size based on a percentage of the original image size. Jobs  
containing PDF, JPEG, TIFF, and BMP files, including mixed files,  
are supported.  
Settings are applied to all files in the job and all pages in the  
file.  
For TIFFs, JPGs, or BMPs, the image is resized; for PDFs, the  
page is resized.  
For pages with multiple images, each page—not each  
individual image on a page—will be scaled or resized to the  
specified size.  
NOTE: You cannot resize individual images on a PDF page.  
To resize  
1. To access the Resize settings dialog, double-click the [Resize]  
step in a workflow.  
2. Select from the following:  
[Scale to size] to select image resizing to a specific size.  
[Scale by percent] to select image resizing based on a  
percentage of the original image or PDF page size.  
[Width] to select a specific width or a percentage of the  
original width. Default: 8.5” or 100%.  
[Height] to select a specific height or a percentage of the  
original width. Default: 11.00” or 100%.  
[Constrain proportions] to set an equal width and height  
scale percentage by changing only the width value. The  
link below the spin boxes is connected when this option is  
selected and unconnected when not selected. Available  
when [Scale by percent] is selected.  
3. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
4. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Configuring Imposition settings  
The Imposition process allows you to define the placement of  
page elements to increase production press efficiency and to  
create specific applications—for example, booklets.  
If PREPS is installed on the computer, the initial Imposition  
Settings dialog allows you to choose one of the following:  
Specify imposition settings: When you select [OK], displays  
the FreeFlow Process Manager Imposition Settings dialog, in  
which you can establish the desired settings.  
Use Preps job file: When you select [OK], displays the Preps  
Imposition Settings dialog, in which you can select Preps  
templates.  
See also:  
2-86  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
To configure Imposition settings - General tab  
The General tab allows you to select a job type and establish  
settings—for example, orientation, stock, margins, and various  
signature options.  
1. Double-click the Imposition step in a workflow.  
If Preps is detected on the computer, the initial Imposition  
Settings dialog displays. Select [Specify imposition  
settings], and then select [OK] to close the window and  
display the Imposition Settings dialog.  
If Preps is not detected on the computer, the standard  
Imposition Settings dialog displays.  
2. In the Imposition Settings dialog, select the General tab.  
3. Select a job type from the drop box.  
For more information about job types, see About Job  
4. The Preview pane allows you to dynamically view the  
selected settings. Mark or deselect the [Preview] check box to  
open or close the Preview pane. For more information about  
the Preview option, see Previewing job level edits.  
5. For Custom N-up jobs, in the Rows and Columns area, select  
or type the number of rows or columns, up to a maximum of  
16.  
6. In the Pages on sheet side area, select from the following:  
[Repeated] to fill a multi-up sheet side with copies of a  
single page.  
[Sequential] to place a single page in each cell of the  
multi-page up.  
[Cut and Stack] to arrange the order that the images are  
printed on the sheets so the printed sheets can be cut and  
easily stacked into one copy of the final document.  
[Alternating] to place the pages sequentially, but  
alternating the front side and the back side of a page.  
7. In the Orientation area, select from of the following:  
[Portrait] to orient vertically.  
[Landscape] to orient horizontally.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
8. In the Sides imaged area, select from the following:  
[1 sided] to print on one side of a page.  
[2 sided] to print on both sides of a page.  
[Head to Toe] to print the reverse side of a page so the  
finished document has a calendar format.  
9. In the Paper Stock area, select a stock type from the drop box.  
10. Select [Automatic] from the drop box to enable the automatic  
selection of stock or creation of custom stock based on the  
cells of a specific job.  
Mark the check box for [Select auto stock from the  
nearest standard type if possible] and select from the  
following stock types:  
Constrain to English stock types: to search the list  
of named English stocks for one large enough to  
encompass the layout area.  
Constrain to metric stock types: to search the list of  
Metric stocks for one large enough to encompass the  
layout area.  
No regional constraint: to search the list of Metric  
and English stocks for one large enough to encompass  
the layout area. For more information, see Automatic  
NOTE 1:If the Select auto stock from the nearest standard type  
check box is not marked, a custom stock is created that  
encompasses the layout area. It may or may not equate to a  
standard named stock.  
NOTE 2:The auto stock feature produces an imposition result, not  
a print result. Print output stock is selected in the Print node  
dialog.  
11. Select [Custom] paper stock to enable the [Width] and  
[Height] options, and then type the desired value.  
2-88  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
12. In the Margins area, select or type the margin for each option:  
[Top], [Left], [Bottom], and [Right]; or select [Uniform] to  
change all settings to the Top setting.  
13. In the Page Position and Autofit area, select from the  
following:  
In the Positon Relative to area, designate a PDF box,  
either [PDF Crop Box], [PDF Trim Box], [PDF Bleed  
Box], and [PDF Art Box], upon which the size of the cells  
that are being imposed is based.  
14. You can specify a horizontal and vertical cell-relative position  
for the PDF image (logical page) within an imposed sheet cell,  
and thereby reduce the amount of cut and trim post-printing.  
Select from the following:  
[Horizontal] to specify the horizontal anchor position  
reference edge of the image alignment. Available if not  
centered. Select from the following:  
[From left], [From right], [Center]: Always available.  
[From binding edge]: Available if 2-sided document.  
[From non-binding edge]: Available if 2-sided  
document.  
[Vertical] to specify vertical anchor position reference  
edge of the image alignment. Available if not centered.  
Select from the following:  
[From top], [From bottom], [Center]: Always available  
[From binding edge]: Available if Head-to-toe  
document.  
[From non-binding edge]: Available if Head-to-toe  
document.  
NOTE: Earlier versions of Process Manager (2.0, 3.0, 4.0)  
used the uni-dimensional Anchor Image function. Legacy  
workflows will be translated into a 2-dimensional format.  
Horizontal and vertical values will be 0.00. Edge settings will  
be translated into the appropriate dimensional control element,  
taking into consideration document plex.  
NOTE: Page imagery is typically allowed to bleed beyond the  
selected PDF box. However, the selected PDF box can act to  
crop imagery that lies beyond it if the user specifies a margin  
of any size or dimension.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
15. To enable cell clustering, mark the check box for [Cluster  
imposed cells]. For more information about clustering, see  
16. Select from the following to specify the space or “gutter”  
between the clustered cells:  
[Gutter width] To specify a single horizontal gutter value.  
[Gutter height] To specify a single vertical gutter value.  
Gutters are applied between the cells and do not affect border  
gutters.  
NOTE: With the Autofit check box marked and gutter values  
specified, the Autofit cell size is reduced by half the gutter in  
both the vertical and horizontal dimension. Any page content  
that exists outside of the selected PDF box bleeds into (half)  
the gutter area between imposed cells.  
17. Select [Autofit] to scale the image to fit inside the cell.  
18. Select from the following signature options:  
[Signature Shift] to specify an incrementing offset for  
incoming PDF pages on the output paper stock for Book,  
Pamphlet, and Calendar job styles.  
[Single signature] when cleared, to specify the number of  
sheets per signature segment; when selected, to place all  
sheets in one signature.  
[Sheets per signature] to enter the number of sheets that  
will comprise a single segment of a multiple-segment  
signature document, from 1-999. Available when Single  
signature checkbox is unchecked.  
[Fill last segment] to fill the document with blank sheets to  
ensure the last segment in the job is filled to the value  
specified in Sheets per signature. Available when Single  
signature checkbox is not selected.  
NOTE: The number of sheets in the final signature may not  
equal the requested value when Sheets per signature does  
not divide evenly into the number of sheets.  
19. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings or to override any similar settings in an  
incoming JDF job ticket or an RDO file. The settings will  
appear in the Submission Client controls, but will be grayed  
out and unchangeable.  
2-90  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
To configure Imposition settings - Crop Marks tab  
The Crop Marks tab includes options that allow you to print guide  
or “cut” marks that define the edges of multiple pages of a job  
printed on larger paper stock. You can:  
Define the size and color of the crop marks.  
Define the sheet faces to which to apply the crop marks for  
simplex and duplex jobs.  
1. Double-click the Imposition step in a workflow.  
2. If Preps is detected on the computer, the initial Imposition  
Settings dialog displays. Select [Specify imposition  
settings], and select [OK] to close the window and display the  
Imposition Settings dialog.  
If Preps is not detected on the computer, the standard  
Imposition Settings dialog displays.  
3. In the Imposition Settings dialog, select the Crop Marks tab.  
4. In the Crop mark box window, select from the following:  
[Media Sheet] to define the crop margin relative to the  
sheet regardless of imposition job type. Range is:  
0 to remaining width of paper stock for Left and Right  
controls.  
0 to remaining height of paper stock for Top and  
Bottom controls.  
[Media Cell] to define the crop margin relative to each cell  
on the sheet. Range is:  
0 to remaining width of cell for Left and Right controls.  
0 to remaining height of cell for Top and Bottom  
controls.  
[Cell Cluster] to define the crop margin relative to each  
cell cluster on the sheet.  
For more information about clustering, see Guidelines for  
[PDF Crop Box] to define the boundary for the contents of  
the page when it is displayed or printed.  
[PDF Trim Box] to define the finished dimensions of the  
page after trimming.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
[PDF Bleed Box] to define the amount of extra area to  
image outside of the final page size defined by the PDF  
Trim Box.  
[PDF Art Box] to define the area of the page where PDF  
content is placed.  
For more information about PDF boxes, see PDF Page  
NOTE: Bleed, Trim, and Art boxes must be smaller than or  
equal to the defined PDF Crop Box.  
5. In the crop marks offsets area, specify offsets from the edges  
of the selected crop mark box:  
[Top], [Bottom], [Left], and [Right] to set the desired  
offsets.  
[Uniform] to define all offsets; defined by the Top offset.  
[Inward offset] to place offsets inside the perimeter of the  
selected box.  
[Outward offset] to specify offsets outside the perimeter  
of the selected box.  
NOTE: The Outward offset option is disabled for media sheet  
crop marks.  
Offsets must be all inward or all outward. Negative offset  
values are not allowed.  
NOTE: For the PDF box options, the above options define the  
box relative to the size of the PDF page being imposed. The  
box is affected by and moved according to all transformations  
of the page such as Autofit, Margin, and Page Image Position/  
Alignment settings. The range is 0 to 60 inches and the metric  
equivalent.  
Use care with this option as it is possible to specify a box  
rectangle that exceeds the actual page size or that is clipped  
off by the sheet cell(s) during imposition.  
2-92  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
6. Select from the following Sheet Face options:  
[Mark both sides] to place crop marks on the front and  
back of sheets. This is the default selection when a duplex  
job is defined.  
[Mark front side only] to place crop marks on the front  
side of sheets. This is the default selection when a simplex  
job is defined.  
[Mark back side only] to place crop marks on the back of  
sheets.  
7. Select from the following Interval options:  
[Mark every sheet] to apply crop marks to all sheets in the  
output.  
[Mark first sheet] to apply crop marks to the first sheet in  
the output  
[Mark last sheet] to apply crop marks to the last sheet in  
the output.  
[Mark every] to apply crop marks to every “n” sheet as  
defined by the user via the sheets spin box. Range: 1 to  
500.  
[Starting with the first sheet] to start crop marks on  
the first sheet when selected, or on sheet(s) N when  
not selected.  
8. Select from the following Size and Color options:  
[Crop mark length]: Defines the length of the crop mark  
from corner offset outward to the edge of the cell, sheet, or  
page.  
[Crop mark color]: Defines the color of the crop mark.  
[Crop mark bleed]: Defines the distance between the crop  
marks and the corner of the rectangle the crop marks  
identify. For example, if the bleed length is set to “0,” the  
horizontal and vertical crop mark lines that form a corner  
would meet. Larger values space the lines away from each  
other.  
9. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
NOTE: If printing, ensure that the sides imaged and the paper  
stock options in the print component are consistent with the  
options specified here.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Guidelines for Cell Clustering  
A cell is the area on a sheet occupied by a multipage imposition  
scheme. Cell Clustering provides the option of pulling together  
cells on a sheet in a way that results in cell sizes that contain the  
imposed page images with no waste space between cells. The  
Cell Cluster is positioned and aligned as a single entity.  
Cell Clustering is not available for Standard and Signature job  
types. The cells in a signature job configuration are pulled  
together using the “Binding-edge” alignment option.  
With Autofit off it is possible to yield cell sizes that when  
clustered, produce a layout area that exceeds the dimensions  
of the paper stock. As a result, only a portion of the NxN cell  
matrix may appear on the cell with the rest of the cells partially  
or completely clipped by the defined paper stock size.  
The position and alignment controls control the cell cluster.  
The ability to justify content within a cell is lost. All content is  
justified top-left within a cell.  
With Cell Clustering OFF, the imposition entities being  
controlled are the individual page images with respect to  
position, alignment, and autofit. With Cell clustering ON, the  
entity being controlled is the entire cluster of cells.  
2-94  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
PDF Page Box Considerations  
The PDF Boxes allow you to perform an “automated crop” by  
using a box defined within the PDF, rather than tailoring a  
workflow specific to an input document type. You can use the  
PDF boxes to meet specific job requirements—for example,  
the PDF Art Box can represent document fold lines.  
The PDF Media box option is not supported in imposition, but  
you can create an equivalent during imposition via the Paper  
Stock setting. The PDF Media Box describes the whole area of  
the PDF document including gutters and trim areas. All other  
box definitions are sub-areas of the media box. It is not  
changeable by the user and is established when the PDF  
document is created.  
The Trim, Bleed and Art boxes must be smaller than the Crop  
Box. Box edges defined in the input document that are beyond  
the corresponding crop box edge are limited to the crop box  
edge during imposition.  
You can select which of the four supported PDF boxes to be  
used for positioning and autofit. Note that the PDF page is not  
clipped by the selected box unless margins are applied.  
Enabling autofit will cause the selected box to scale to fit the  
sheet cell it is being imposed into. PDF page data may bleed  
outside of the selected box into any sheet cell waste-  
space created during autofit scaling as long as it does not  
intrude into a neighboring imposition cell.  
Bleeds beyond the selected PDF box are disabled if any  
margins are applied.  
From the perspective of downstream workflow components,  
page size in the output document is the selected paper stock  
upon which the input document is imposed.  
PDF Page Box Limitations  
There is no support for Media Boxes.  
Bleed, Trim, and Art boxes must be smaller than or equal to  
the defined Crop box.  
Box offsets in the input document do not carry over into the  
imposed output document – all offsets are set at 0 in the  
output document.  
You can make PDF box definitions unique on a page-by-page  
basis. Asymmetric imposition results occur if these definitions  
are not consistent throughout the document.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
About Job types  
The following job types are available via the Imposition Settings  
dialog:  
Standard: The pages are printed in a sequential order with  
one page on one side of a sheet of defined paper stock. There  
is one Standard job type, for which you can specify the image  
orientation and sides imaged.  
Signature: Two separate pages are printed side-by-side on  
one side of a sheet of paper. All Signature documents are 2-  
sided. The pages of the document are sequenced when  
printed to produce output that can be folded to create a  
booklet type of document. There are three signature job types,  
each characterized by the fold (binding edge) of the document:  
Signature Booklet: Portrait, fold (binding edge) is parallel  
to short edge of the stock  
Signature Calendar: Head to Toe orientation, fold  
(binding edge) is parallel to short edge of the stock  
Signature Pamphlet: Portrait orientation, fold (binding  
edge) is parallel to the long edge of the stock  
N-up: The pages are printed in sequential order with each  
page of the document appearing a specified number of times  
(n) on the same side of a sheet of paper. (This is also known  
as multiple imposition or tiling.) Each copy of the page is called  
a cell. There are ten n-up job types:  
2 Up: Each page is imaged twice on one side of a sheet of  
paper.  
2 Up Flip Left: Each page is imaged twice on one side of a  
sheet of paper with the left of the two imaged pages flipped  
180 degrees to appear upside down.  
2 Up Flip Right: Each page is imaged twice on one side of  
a sheet of paper with the right of the two imaged pages  
flipped 180 degrees to appear upside down.  
2-96  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
3 Up: Each page is imaged three times on one side of a sheet  
of paper.  
3 Up Flip Left: Each page is imaged three times on one side  
of a sheet of paper with the left of the three imaged pages  
flipped 180 degrees to appear upside down.  
3 Up Flip Right: Each page is imaged three times on one side  
of a sheet of paper with the right of the three imaged pages  
flipped 180 degrees to appear upside down.  
4 Up: Each page is imaged four times on one side of a sheet  
of paper. There is no flip option for 4-Up.  
8 Up: Each page is imaged eight times on one side of a sheet  
of paper. There is no flip option for 8-Up.  
16 Up: Each page is imaged sixteen times on one side of a  
sheet of paper. There is no flip option for 16-Up.  
Custom N-Up: Allows the user to specify rows and columns in  
combination with Orientation, Sides Imaged, Margins, Paper  
Stock, and Autofit options. The following options are grayed  
out if Custom N-Up is not selected:  
Rows (maximum of 16)  
Columns (maximum of 16)  
Pages on Sheet Side; Repeated; SequentiaI; Cut and  
Stack; Alternating  
Maximum N-Up: Given an input page size, calculates how  
many of those pages can be fit onto the sheet. See also  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Maximum N-Up considerations  
Maximum N-up might benefit workflows where resource  
utilization is of a higher-priority than layout scheme.  
The N-up cell count is based on the size of the configured  
imposition reference box (PDF box) on the first page of the  
document only. If the selected reference box is not of  
consistent size throughout the input document, unusual  
clipping or seemingly asymmetric output will result.  
The application of gutters when this feature is used with  
imposition cell clustering will be accounted for in the layout  
computations and therefore, total N-up cells maybe be  
reduced as a result.  
The use of gutters in conjunction with imposition cell clustering  
may result in a reduction of total N-up cells.  
If the input page size reference is larger than the selected  
stock size, a Standard non-Autofit job style output results.  
If the number of pages in the input document cannot fill all the  
cells for the N-up, a partial N-up output results.  
Autofit functionality is not available with this configuration.  
The maximum number of rows and/or columns is limited to 16  
in each direction.  
Automatic stock type considerations  
The Automatic Paper Stock type option selects or creates a  
custom stock configuration that completely contains the cells of a  
specified job type. This option is useful for “intermediate”  
imposition steps in multi-imposition workflows.  
Imposition result vs print result The automatic stock feature  
produces an imposition result – not a print result. The stock size  
defined by the code logic cannot be communicated to the print  
component logic because there is no means in Process Manager  
to achieve this at job run-time. The printed output stock is selected  
in the print node or as configured by the XPIF ticket during hot-  
folder operation.  
2-98  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Stock dimensions based on reference box The stock  
dimensions are based on the resulting cell layout of the job type  
and the size of the configured imposition reference box (PDF box)  
on the first page of the input document only. If the reference box  
is consistent size throughout the input document, unusual clipping  
or unexpected border-gutter space may result.  
Regional prioritization If you prioritize the automatic selection to  
one of the standard named stock configurations, you may further  
constrain the standard stock type used by regionality.  
For each of the options, If no stock among the set is large enough  
to encompass the layout area, a Custom type is created.  
If a standard stock type is identified, orientation is  
dynamically configured to choose a stock orientation that  
minimizes post-imposition waste areas.  
If the subsequent layout exceeds the size of an identifiable  
standard stock type, a Custom stock type that  
encompasses the layout area is created.  
If you choose not to prioritize among standard stock types,  
a stock type that wholly encompasses the layout area is  
created. This might equate dimensionally to a standard  
named stock type.  
Maximum size The maximum size for an automatic stock is 60” in  
either direction.  
Both Maximum N-up and Automatic stock selected If you  
select both Maximum N-up and Automatic stock configurations,  
the result is a Standard, non-Autofit job style output as the  
maximum number of cells that can be fit onto a undefined area is  
always equal to one.  
Maximum N-Up limitations  
Cannot be used to automatically configure the printed stock.  
No support for Media Boxes.  
Bleed, Trim and Art boxes must be smaller than or equal to the  
defined Crop box.  
Defined boxes in the input document are not carried over into  
the imposed output document.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Configuring Preps settings  
If Preps is installed on the computer, the initial Imposition Settings  
dialog allows you to choose one of the following:  
Specify imposition settings: Displays the Imposition  
Settings dialog, in which you can establish the desired  
imposition settings.  
Use Preps job file: Displays the Preps Imposition Settings  
dialog, in which you can select Preps job files.  
In Preps, job files are layout masters used in conjunction with a  
set of pages to produce imposed jobs. The Administrator  
establishes the selectable job files from the Preps software. The  
Preps dialog settings allow you to select from a list of Preps  
imposition job files.  
To configure Preps settings  
1. Double-click the Imposition step in a workflow.  
2. If Preps is detected on the computer, the initial Imposition  
Settings dialog displays. Select [Use Preps job file]. Select  
[OK] to close the window and display the Preps Imposition  
Settings dialog.  
NOTE: If Preps is not detected on the computer, the regular  
Imposition Settings dialog displays. For information about  
Preps installation, refer to the procedure “Setting up Preps” in  
the About FreeFlow Process Manager section.  
3. In the “Select the Preps Job files that submitters can choose  
from” text box, select the desired Job files. The Job files will  
populate the “Select the default Preps Job file” drop box.  
4. In the “Select the default Preps Job file” drop box, select a  
default Job file.  
5. If applicable, select [Always use these settings] to prevent  
users from modifying the settings or to override any similar  
settings in an incoming JDF job ticket. The settings will appear  
in the Workflow Submission Client controls, but will be grayed  
out and unchangeable.  
See also:  
2-100  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Limitations for Imposition and PREPS  
If more than one Impose node exists in a workflow – for  
example, workflows with Conditional branches and\or fail  
branches with Impose nodes in more than one branch – the  
propagation code selects the impose node on the top branch  
(or the main branch in case of fail branches) as the "first"  
impose node and propagates it with information from the  
ticket. If the job takes the second branch during the execution,  
the impose node on the second branch, although technically  
the “first" impose node to be encountered by the job, will not  
contain the ticket information.  
JDF imposition parameters cannot be translated into Preps  
imposition templates, and Preps does not support JDF.  
Non-printable content such as bookmarks, sounds, movies,  
logical structure, hyperlinks, and article threads will not be  
preserved by the Preps imposition component.  
No support for imposition marks such as exposure keys will be  
provided within the Xerox imposition templates. Such items  
are typically placed in the “gutter” area of the press sheet. This  
type of advanced feature is available in Kodak Preps.  
VI Containers should not be used with PREPS. Process  
Manager handles these as containers, not PDF files.  
When you submit a job to a Process Manager workflow that  
includes Imposition with PREPS, ensure that the PREPS  
application is not running if the license is only for one instance  
of PREPS.  
Fault handling for Imposition  
Errors are logged in the Windows Event log and display in the  
Workflow Job Manager status display area. The following errors  
cause the Imposition operation to fail:  
If the input PDF file is missing.  
If the input PDF file is invalid.  
If the output PDF file is locked and cannot be overwritten or if  
the user lacks sufficient security privileges to access the  
destination directory.  
If the input PDF file requires a password to open the PDF or  
does not permit any of the following: content copying and  
extraction, document assembly, or content accessibility.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Cropping  
The Crop feature allows you to automatically crop PDF, JPEG,  
TIFF, and BMP files. A job can include all supported file types.  
Equal cropping is applied to all files in the job.  
To crop  
1. To access the Crop dialog, double-click the [Crop] step in a  
workflow.  
2. In the Edge offset section, enter a number or click the up and  
down arrows to define crop position from the Left, Right, Top,  
or Bottom edge of the page.  
3. If desired, select [Uniform] to enable the following options:  
[All edges]: Makes all values equal to the Left entry.  
[Opposite edges]: Makes Left and Right values equal to  
the Left entry; makes Top and Bottom values equal to the  
Top entry.  
4. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
5. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
2-102  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Configuring Pressmarks settings  
The Pressmarks node allows you to add a fixed pressmark to a  
workflow. You can specify the pressmark placement, rotation,  
frequency, transparency, and then preview the specifications.  
To set up or modify a pressmark  
1. Double-click a Pressmarks process in a workflow to open the  
Add Pressmarks dialog.  
2. To preview the pressmark placement in the document, select  
[Preview>>]. For more information about the Preview option,  
3. Select one of the following:  
Select [New], and then select [Image Pressmark] to open  
the New Image Pressmark dialog and set up a pressmark.  
Select a pressmark from the list, and then select [Modify]  
to open the Modify Image Pressmark dialog and change  
the pressmark.  
To Duplicate or delete a pressmark, see Duplicating or  
4. Select [Browse] to locate an image file of the type listed in the  
drop box.  
NOTE: The selected image must reside on a local drive.  
a. In the Browse for Pressmark Image File dialog, select a  
file.  
b. Select [Open]. The dialog closes and the path and file  
name display in the Pressmark filename text box.  
5. In the Modify Image Pressmark or New Image Pressmark  
dialog, select a percentage from 1 to 200 to scale the image.  
6. Select or type the horizontal position from the PDF document  
box: [From left], [Center], or [From right].  
7. Select or type the vertical position from the PDF document  
box: [From top], [Center], or [From bottom].  
8. Select a position relative to [Crop Box], [Media Box], [Bleed  
Box], [Trim Box] or [Art Box].  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
9. Select the desired degree of rotation, from 0-359 degrees. The  
icon changes to reflect the selected rotation.  
10. Select a transparency from 0-100. The greater the  
transparency level, the less opaque the pressmark.  
11. In the “Apply to pages” area, select a pressmark frequency  
from the drop box.  
If a range is selected, enter a text string using commas and  
hyphens. For example, select “1-3, 7, 12-14, 17” to print  
bar codes on pages 1 through 3, on page 7, on pages 12  
through 14, and on page 17.  
NOTE: Various order jacket file variables are supported by  
FreeFlow Process Manager MAX, Manifest Automation from  
Xerox. You can enter variable data syntax in the page range  
text box. For example, given an Order jacket file (OJF) with  
columns 1, 2, 3, 4 containing page range data “1-3”, “7”, “12-  
14”, “17” respectively, you can enter text “$CSV1$, $CSV2$,  
$CSV3$, $CSV4$” into the page range text box. If OJF column  
contains an invalid page range, the workflow will fail with an  
invalid page range error in Workflow Job Manager.  
12. Select [OK] to accept the changes, close the window and  
return to the Add Pressmark dialog. The new pressmark  
displays in the Pressmarks list; its description displays to the  
right.  
NOTE: All pressmarks in the list are applied to the job and are  
applied in the order in which they are listed.  
13. If desired, select a pressmark and select [Move Up] or [Move  
Down] to move it up or down in the list, and to define the order  
in which the image is layered on the page.  
14. Select from the following:  
[Place all pressmarks behind page content] to place the  
pressmark underneath the page contents.  
[Place all pressmarks in front of page content] to place  
the pressmark on top of the page contents.  
NOTE: The setting applies to all pressmarks.  
15. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
See also:  
2-104  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Duplicating or deleting a pressmark  
You can duplicate or remove a selected pressmark from the list.  
To duplicate or delete a pressmark  
1. Double-click the Pressmark step in a workflow.  
2. In the Pressmark list, select a pressmark.  
3. Select from the following:  
Select [Delete] to remove the pressmark.  
Select [New], and then select [Duplicate] to copy the  
pressmark.  
4. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
About Review  
The Review process allows you to view the PDF file in its current  
state and approve or fail the document. When a workflow is  
stopped at a Review step, in Workflow Job Manager you can also  
perform the following functions, depending on the makeup of the  
workflow:  
View and edit the file using Adobe Acrobat Professional.  
View a soft proof using Adobe Acrobat Professional.  
Print a hardcopy proof.  
Modify the copy count.  
Change process settings and resubmit the job.  
A settings dialog is not available for Review.  
2-106  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Configuring Notify settings  
The Notify process provides job status notification via e-mail.  
Examples of uses include:  
Job start notification: Notifies the operator that the job is  
beginning.  
Preflight fail notification: Notifies the operator when preflight  
fails, which allows immediate intervention.  
Job finish notification: Notifies the operator that the job is  
completed.  
Email attachments  
If you choose to attach job files, the recipient will be able to  
remotely proof, validate, or repair the PDF file. Compound  
document types, such as RDOs, cannot be attached. The  
maximum attachment size is established using the SMTP Setup  
dialog in Workflow Job Manager. The maximum allowable  
attachment size depends on your email configuration. The email  
notification will fail if the file exceeds the limitation.  
You have the option to add a watermark to the email attachment.  
For more information, see Setting up a watermark in an email  
NOTE 1:If they are allowed to change the settings, operators can  
add, delete, or change the email address in Workflow Submission  
Client when the job is submitted and the workflow is selected.  
NOTE 2:Email notification requires configuration of the SMTP  
server via the Workflow Builder application.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
To configure Notification settings  
1. To access the Notification Settings dialog, double-click the  
Notification step in a workflow.  
NOTE: In the FreeFlow Administration Tool, the administrator  
can modify the user’s contact information and email address.  
When the user logs in to Process Manager, the To and From  
fields in the Notification Settings dialog are automatically set to  
that email address.  
2. Select from the following:  
[Use the job submitter’s email address]: Picks up the  
job submitter’s email address as configured in the  
FreeFlow Administration Tool and uses it as the sender  
address for the notification.  
[Use the following address]: Allows you to enter an email  
address. By default, the text field displays the email  
address of the logged-in user. When submitting a job via a  
hot folder, the user set up in the hot folder dialog is the  
submitting user, and his/her email is used in the  
notification when that option is selected.  
3. In the To text box, type the recipient(s) e-mail address(s). Be  
sure to separate multiple addresses with semicolons.  
NOTE: If addresses are not in the correct format, an error  
message displays.  
4. If desired, select [Send copy of notification to sender] to  
send a copy to the sender.  
5. Select [Enter recipient address during job processing] to  
gray out and clear the “To:” field and hold the job when the  
Notify step is reached. You must then enter recipient  
addresses before continuing with the job.  
2-108  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
6. Select [Enable Custom Subject Line] to enter a text string of  
your choice in the text box, or to select which of the following  
options to include in the subject line:  
Append Job ID  
Append Job Name  
Append Job Status  
7. Select which of the following options to include in the body of  
the mail note:  
Job ID  
Job Name  
Job Status  
Job Submit Date  
Preflight Results  
Job Files  
Low Res version  
8. To include a watermark on the job file, see Setting up a  
NOTE 1:Job files will include the PDF files at this stage of the  
processing.  
NOTE 2:Attached Job files can be viewed, but not printed or  
edited.  
NOTE 3:All options, except Preflight Results and Job Files, are  
selected by default. When Job Files is selected, Send low  
resolution image is selected by default.  
9. Type a message with a maximum of 256 characters.  
10. Select [Allow job to continue even if no notification is sent]  
to ensure that the job does not fail if the email notification is  
not sent due to lack of recipient address or other failure.  
NOTE: When selected, along with [Enter recipient address  
during job processing], the job will stop at Notify, but it will  
continue as successfully completed when you select Resume,  
if you do not enter a recipient.  
11. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Workflow Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out  
and unchangeable.  
12. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Setting up a watermark in an email attachment  
Users with the Unlimited User Conversion License have the option  
to add a fully customizable security watermark to email  
attachments.  
If properly licensed, the user can disable the addition of a security  
watermark by unmarking the [Specify the text to be applied as  
watermark on PDF email attachments] check box.  
For users without the Unlimited User Conversion License, the  
attachment watermark defaults to "PROOF." Users can append  
customized text to "PROOF." The Unlimited User Conversion  
restrictions apply when submitted via hot folders and not via  
Workflow Submission Client.  
The watermark does not appear on the job document.  
See also:  
To set up a watermark in an email attachment  
1. In Workflow Builder, Workflow Submission Client, or Workflow  
Job Manager, select [Options: Email Attachment  
Watermark Setup...] to open the Email attachment  
Watermark Setup dialog.  
2. If unmarked, mark the [Specify the text to be applied as  
watermark on PDF email attachments] check box.  
3. Select the desired font from the drop down menu.  
4. In the Text box, type the desired text, up to 20 characters. The  
text displays in the Sample graphic.  
5. Select [OK] to accept changes and close the window.  
2-110  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Configuring Print settings  
The Print settings dialog allows you to print PDF, VPC, or RDO  
(for reprint) files to a specified production print queue using a  
specified job ticket. A job ticket stores all your document  
information for printing to a production printer.  
Using the Print settings dialog, you can:  
Open a job ticket from a Windows file or document repository.  
NOTE: Job tickets can be applied only to workflows that contain  
the Print task.  
Access the Job Setup dialog for production printing and make  
the desired changes.  
Insert separator pages via the Job Setup dialog.  
If the printer is not available on a standalone client  
If you attempt to open the Print Settings dialog on a Workflow Job  
Manager or Workflow Submission Client standalone client and an  
error message states that the current printer is not available, you  
will need to obtain the list of registered printers.  
On the standalone client, Select [Start: Programs: Registered  
Print List Locator]. In the Registered Print LIst Locator dialog,  
select [Remote] and enter the computer address of the Printer  
Administration server.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
To configure Print settings  
1. To access the Print Settings dialog, double-click the Print step  
in a workflow.  
2. In the “Select printers that submitters can choose from” text  
box, select the desired printers. The printers will populate the  
“Select the default printer” drop box.  
NOTE: Printers are added to the list in the “Select printers that  
submitters can choose from” text box via the Printer  
Registration application.  
3. In the “Default printer” drop box, select the appropriate default  
printer.  
4. Select [Job Setup] to open the Job Setup dialog from  
production printing. Make the desired selections. Options vary  
depending on the selected printer. Refer to the job setup help  
for additional information.  
5. In the Print Settings dialog, select [Always use these  
settings] to prevent users from modifying the settings or to  
override any similar settings in an incoming JDF job ticket or  
an RDO file. The settings will appear in the Workflow  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
6. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
NOTE: Be sure the Print process settings reflect the needs of  
your job. The workflow defaults to the print settings. For  
example, if you select 2-sided in the Imposition settings and  
the default Print process setting is 1-sided, the job will print 1-  
sided.  
2-112  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Inserting separator pages  
Separator pages are available on printers that support special  
page programming. This feature is available only in Process  
Manager, for PDF files.  
NOTE 1:For the “Insert after each set” option, there is a limit of  
1000 separator pages per job.  
NOTE 2:Separator pages cannot be programmed with page  
ranges, finishing, special pages, blank page inserts, or chapter  
starts, in the same job.  
Table 2-14. Example output from each separator page option  
Multiple PDF Files submitted,  
One PDF file submitted,  
collated,  
One PDF file submitted,  
uncollated,  
collated,  
1 copy  
2 copies  
2 copies  
Option: Insert after each file  
Option: Insert after each set  
Option: Insert after each set  
PDF file 1, page 1  
PDF file 1, page 2  
PDF file 1, page 3  
PDF file 1, page 4  
SEPARATOR PAGE  
PDF file 1, page 1, copy 1  
PDF file 1, page 2, copy 1  
PDF file 1, page 3, copy 1  
PDF file 1, page 4, copy 1  
SEPARATOR PAGE  
PDF file 1, page 1, copy 1  
PDF file 1, page 1, copy 2  
SEPARATOR PAGE  
PDF file 1, page 2, copy 1  
PDF file 1, page 2, copy 2  
SEPARATOR PAGE  
PDF file 2, page 1  
PDF file 2, page 2  
PDF file 2, page 3  
SEPARATOR PAGE  
PDF file 1, page 1, copy 2  
PDF file 1, page 2, copy 2  
PDF file 1, page 3, copy 2  
PDF file 1, page 4, copy 2  
SEPARATOR PAGE  
1. In the Print settings dialog, select [Job Setup] to open the Job  
Setup dialog for production printing.  
2. To insert a blank separator page after a file or a set, select the  
Output Format tab. The tab name and options might vary,  
depending on the printer.  
3. Choose from the following in the Separator pages section of  
the tab dialog:  
[Insertion after each set]: Inserts a separator page after  
each set. Depending on your collation settings, if only one  
set is requested, the separator page is inserted after the  
last page of the job.  
[Insert after each file]: Inserts a separator page after each  
PDF file. If the job has only one PDF, the separator page is  
inserted after the last file.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
4. Select a paper stock for the separator page by stock number  
from the drop box.  
NOTE: Options might vary, based on the printer.  
5. In the Job setup tab, select the appropriate orientation to  
ensure that the separator page orientation matches the job  
orientation.  
NOTE: The Orientation option is enabled when the separator  
page feature is selected.  
6. Select [OK].  
Limitations for separator pages  
Separator pages are available for PDF file printing only. Other  
file types generate an error message.  
No imaging is available on the separator page.  
Fault handling for Print  
Errors are logged in the Windows Event log and displayed in the  
Job Manager status display area. The following errors cause the  
print operation to fail:  
If the specified PDF file(s), queue(s), or job ticket(s) are  
missing or invalid.  
If the specified PDF file(s) or job ticket(s) are invalid.  
If any of the input PDF file(s) require a password to open the  
PDF.  
If a user submits a non-PDF file to a workflow that has been  
programmed with separator pages, an “unsupported job ticket  
feature” error message displays.  
DocuSP printers printing via Process Manager will error if the  
user has not rentered an FTP login, or has entered invaild  
credentials.  
2-114  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Configuring Save settings  
The Save process allows you to copy all supported file types to a  
specified location within a document repository or Windows File  
system. Dialog options include:  
Save job ticket information: Allows you to save the job ticket  
(XPIF) with the PDF file for reprinting purposes.  
See also:  
To configure Save settings  
1. To access the Save Settings dialog, double-click the Save  
step in a workflow. Select from the following:  
a. [Use job name as file name] to use the job name as a  
basis for the file name for job submission.  
b. [Use the following as file name] to enter the desired  
name. In the File name text box, type a name that will be  
used as the basis for the file name for job submission.  
NOTE: If incorrect file characters (for example, \ / : * ? < >) are  
entered, an error message displays.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
2. Select one of the following:  
NOTE 1:You might be prompted for a login and password if you  
attempt to access a mapped location.  
NOTE 2:Prior to perfoming operations that require repository  
access, you must set up and save your repository credentials in  
FreeFlow Process Manager. If you select [Browse Repository]  
and no credentials have been established, you will be prompted to  
enter credentials. For more information, see Setting up repository  
[Browse Windows...] to open the Windows file dialog for  
selecting a file location.  
[Browse Repository...] to open a repository dialog for  
selecting a repository location.  
The Location text box is populated with the path specified  
during the browse process.  
3. Select [Save job ticket information] to save a job ticket (.xpf)  
with the PDF file for reprinting later. The .xpf job ticket is  
saved, along with the PDF file, in the location designated in  
Save.  
4. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Workflow Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out  
and unchangeable.  
5. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
2-116  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Saving a job ticket with the PDF file for reprinting  
NOTE: To save the job ticket, a Print process must be included in  
the workflow prior to the Save process.  
The [Save the job ticket] option in the Save Settings dialog  
allows you to save the job ticket (.xpf) information with the PDF file  
for reprinting purposes. An .xpf job ticket is automatically saved in  
the same folder as the PDF. The last settings that were used to  
successfully process the Print node are saved. The settings can  
be from any of the following:  
An .xpf job ticket.  
Print node settings if “Always use these settings” is selected.  
A job ticket that was updated in Workflow Job Manager using  
the Settings button.  
To associate the .xpf job ticket with the files to be processed, an  
.xpf job ticket is saved using the following naming conventions:  
For files: <file name>. <file extension>.xpf, for example:  
PDF file name = brochure.pdf  
.xpf file name = brochure.pdf.xpf  
NOTE: If you move or rename the job files, you must also move  
and rename the associated .xpf job ticket.  
Using Workflow Submission Client to reprint  
Submit only the saved PDF file to the reprint workflow. Process  
Manager automatically picks up the associated job ticket and  
applies it to all print nodes in the workflow.  
Using a hot folder to reprint  
You must submit the saved PDF file and the associated .xpf file to  
the reprint workflow. The files are dropped into the Waiting for  
Job Ticket folder inside the hot folder. Process Manager applies  
the saved job ticket to all print nodes in the workflow.  
NOTE: When reprinting with Workflow Submission Client or a hot  
folder, if “Always use these settings” is checked in the Print node,  
the Print node settings take precedence over the .xpf job ticket.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Builder  
Limitations for Save  
You cannot create collections or folders during save  
operations. These must be set up in advance.  
For Process Manager to pick up the associated .xpf job tickets,  
the tickets must be in the same directory as the files to be  
processed, and must follow the appropriate naming  
convention. If you move or rename the job files, you must  
move and rename the associated .xpf ticket as well.  
Fault handling for Save  
Errors are logged in the Windows Event log and display in the Job  
Manager status display area. The following errors cause the save  
operation to fail:  
If the input PDF file is missing.  
If the destination PDF is locked and cannot be overwritten, or if  
the user lacks sufficient security privileges to access the  
destination directory or document repository.  
If the destination directory or document repository has been  
deleted.  
If invalid credentials have been set up, or no credentials have  
been established.  
2-118  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Configuring JDF Export settings  
Job Definition Format (JDF) is a universal job ticket format. JDF  
capabilities enable Process Manager to use existing JDF job  
tickets and to create new JDF job tickets.  
JDF job tickets are submitted via a hot folder. The hot folder is  
monitored by the Process Manager application, which looks for  
JDF tickets and submits them to the workflow.  
To configure JDF Export settings  
JDF Export settings allow you to designate a JDF Export file  
destination. The filename cannot exceed 80 characters, and the  
directory path cannot exceed 160 characters.  
The output file of a JDF export task can be reimported and rerun  
by dropping it into a hot folder associated with an appropriate  
workflow. The files associated with the JDF must be in the same  
location as the original job.  
1. To access the JDF Export Settings dialog, double-click the  
JDF Export step in a workflow.  
2. In the Export Options section, select from the following:  
[Export the Process Manager workflow job as a new  
JDF] to export the supported workflow nodes as JDF.  
[Export the JDF submitted with any modifications  
made by external processes] to export the submitted  
JDF. If external processes are present in the workflow, the  
exported JDF will contain the changes made by the  
external process nodes. For more information, see About  
3. Select one of the following:  
[Use job name as file name] to use the job name as the  
exported JDF file name.  
[Use the following as file name] to specify a file name. In  
the File name text box, type the name.  
NOTE: If incorrect file characters (for example, \ / : * ? < >) are  
entered, an error message displays.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
4. Select from the following:  
NOTE 1:You might be prompted for a login and password if you  
attempt to access a mapped location.  
NOTE 2:Prior to perfoming operations that require repository  
access, you must set up and save your repository credentials in  
FreeFlow Process Manager. For more information, see Setting up  
[Browse Windows...] to open the Windows file dialog for  
selecting a folder location.  
[Browse Repository...] to open a repository dialog for  
selecting a repository location.  
The Location text box is populated with the path specified  
during the browse process.  
5. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out and  
unchangeable.  
6. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the window.  
See also:  
About JDF Export options  
If you export the workflow JDF by selecting [Export the Process  
Manager workflow job as a new JDF] the JDF Export node  
functions as it always has.  
If you submit a JDF file to a workflow that contains a JDF Export  
node:  
If the job does not encounter an External Process node, the  
JDF Export node exports a copy of the submitted JDF file.  
If the job encounters an External Process node, and you select  
the option to send the JDF and an XML file by selecting  
[Export the JDF submitted with any modifications made  
by external processes], the JDF Export node exports a copy  
of the JDF file returned by the External Process node.  
2-120  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
If the job encounters an External Process node, and you do  
not select the option to send the JDF and an XML by selecting  
[Export the Process Manager workflow job as a new JDF],  
the JDF Export node exports a copy of the submitted JDF file.  
If you select to export the submitted JDF file and a JDF file  
was not submitted to the workflow, the JDF Export node will  
fail.  
In all cases that a JDF file is exported, the exported JDF file is  
updated to reference the PDF file being exported.  
Fault handling for JDF Export  
Errors are logged in the Windows Event log and display in the Job  
Manager status display area. The following errors cause the  
export operation to fail:  
If the destination specified during JDF Export is missing or  
invalid.  
If the user lacks sufficient security privileges to create the  
specified files in the destination directory specified during JDF  
Export.  
If the workflow contains a non-supported task.  
If the workflow does not contain all the tasks it needs.  
If the JDF file is missing the original file paths.  
JDF and Color Manage  
When submitting a JDF ticket to a workflow, only the color profile  
being used by the JDF ticket is visible in the Color settings in the  
Optimize node. Normally, when submitting jobs, all default options  
— the set of installed CMYK color profiles, and the srgb color  
space profile.icm — are visible.  
NOTE 1:To enable color management, the Optimize node  
settings should be set as follows: in the General tab, de-select the  
check box for “Create a document that complies with PDF/X  
standards.” In the Color tab, in the “Change all colors in  
document” drop box, select “Manage Color profiles.”  
NOTE 2:When the JDF ticket specifies a color profile, the color  
profile must be installed on the Process Manager Server or the job  
will fail.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Limitations when creating JDF Tickets in Adobe Acrobat Professional  
To create a JDF ticket in Adobe Acrobat Professional for  
submission to FreeFlow Process Manager, for the JDF ticket to be  
handled properly, you must specify the number of pages in the  
document or the pages in the range.  
To specify the number of pages  
1. Select [Start: Programs: Adobe Acrobat Professional].  
2. In Adobe Acrobat Professional, select [Tools: Print  
Production: JDF Job Definitions...].  
3. Select [New]  
4. In the Create New Job Definition dialog, browse to the desired  
selection and select [Save]. The file path displays in the  
Filename text box.  
5. Select [Create and Edit].  
6. In the Edit JDF Job Definitions dialog, select [Add Section].  
7. In the Number of Pages section, enter the appropriate value.  
8. Select [OK].  
9. Close the dialog.  
10. Exit Adobe Acrobat Professional.  
To specify the pages in the range  
1. Select [Start: Programs: Adobe Acrobat Professional].  
2. In Adobe Acrobat Professional, select [Tools: Print  
Production: JDF Job Definitions...].  
3. Select [New].  
4. In the Create New Job Definition dialog, browse to a selection  
and select [Save]. The file path displays in the Filename text  
box.  
5. Select [Create and Edit].  
6. In the Edit JDF Job Definitions dialog, select [Add Section].  
7. Select [Add File].  
8. In the Pages to Pages to use in Document section, enter a  
value for Pages in the Range.  
9. Select [OK].  
10. Close the dialog.  
11. Exit Adobe Acrobat Professional.  
2-122  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Creating conditional branches  
Conditional branching provides an added level of logic to a  
workflow, allowing it to examine the properties of submitted jobs,  
and then act accordingly without human intervention.  
You can add one or more conditional branches to a workflow,  
each with one or more user-designated conditions that specify the  
desired attributes or properties of the submitted jobs.  
During execution, the condition(s) of each branch are compared  
with the information retrieved from the job. The first branch whose  
conditions or specifications “match” the properties retrieved from  
the job will be taken.  
Each Conditional node can include up to 12 branches; each  
branch can include up to 12 conditions that must be satisfied.  
You can specify two main categories of conditions:  
PDF-related conditions  
JDF ticket-related conditions  
For more information about these conditions, see the Conditions  
to Add table.  
The branches of a Conditional node can be merged into a  
common workflow. For more information, see Linking conditional  
Conditional branching provides an alternative to using Preflight as  
a means to filter and route jobs. For more information, see Using  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Guidelines for successful conditional branching  
Number of branches and conditions: A Conditional node is  
limited to 12 outbound branches. Each branch can have up to 12  
conditions.  
Nested branching: Nesting occurs when a Conditional node  
directly follows a branch of another Conditional node. You can  
have up to two nested Conditional nodes.  
Execution sequence: Branches are checked from the top branch  
to the bottom. The top branch conditions are checked first. If the  
conditions are satisfied, the top branch is taken. Otherwise, the  
second branch is checked, and so on. Branch order is defined in  
the Conditional Branch Settings dialog.  
Number of documents per job: Single document jobs can be  
processed by the Conditional Branching node. Multiple document  
jobs can be processed only if a Join node precedes the conditional  
branch.  
Fail branches: A Fail branch can be added to Conditional node.  
The Fail branch is not considered part of the Conditional Branch  
and is not displayed in the Conditional Branch Settings dialog.  
JDF Export: Workflows with a Conditional Branch do not support  
JDF Export.  
Conditions from more than one category: Different categories  
can be combined in one branch. For example, a branch can  
contain both PDF and JDF conditions.  
Modifying conditional branches in Workflow Submission  
Client: You can add or remove conditions for a Conditional  
branch. You cannot do the following:  
Add or remove branches.  
Rearrange the order of the branches.  
Change branch names.  
2-124  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Failed status: A job will fail if:  
None of the conditional branches match the job and there is no  
pass-through branch.  
The file is corrupted.  
If the necessary information is not available to evaluate a  
condition. For example, if a PDF file is submitted to a branch  
with a PDF bleedbox condition and bleedbox is not defined in  
the PDF file, the job will fail.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Adding and configuring branch conditions  
You can place a Conditional process anywhere in a workflow that  
a decision must be made. Node configuration is perforned via the  
Branch Conditions [Branch Name] dialog, where you add  
branches and define or edit their conditions. Twelve branches are  
allowed per Conditional node, 12 conditions are allowed per  
Conditional branch.  
To add and configure branch conditions  
1. In Workflow Builder, drag and drop a Conditional process into  
the workflow. The Conditional Branch Settings dialog  
automatically opens.  
2. Select [New Branch...].  
3. In the Branch Conditions dialog, enter a name in the Branch  
name text box. The name display in the dialog title later, when  
you open the dialog to view or edit conditions.  
The options in the “This branch will only accept” area ensure  
that only the desired file types are examined by the branch.  
For example, if you select [PDF format files] and you submit a  
.doc file to the workflow, the system does not attempt to apply  
PDF-only conditions to the file. The branch is skipped; no  
errors are generated.  
4. In the “This branch will only accept” area, select from the  
following:  
[PDF format files]: To enable the addition of PDF  
conditions.  
[Documents submitted with JDF job tickets]: To enable  
the branch to accept only files submitted with JDF job  
tickets and to enable the addition of JDF-specific  
conditions.  
Select both options.  
Select neither option.  
2-126  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
5. In the “Conditions that must be met” drop box, select from the  
following:  
[Any]: To establish that one or more conditions must be  
met for the branch to be considered a match.  
[All]: To establish that all conditions must be met for the  
branch to be considered a match.  
6. In the “Conditions to add” area, select a condition.  
NOTE: Refer to the Conditions to Add table for a description of the  
conditions and their qualifiers. Qualifiers vary based on the  
selected condition, for example, “PDF format files.”  
7. Select the desired qualifiers for the condition.  
8. Enter text, if required.  
9. After all fields are configured, select [Add] to add the condition  
and display it in the Conditions List.  
10. If required, select a condition, and then select [Delete] to  
remove the condition from the Conditions List.  
11. Add more conditions, if desired, up to 12 per branch.  
12. Select [OK]. The Conditional Branch Settings dialog displays.  
13. To change the branch order or otherwise manage the existing  
14. Select [OK]. A new branch displays in the workflow next to the  
Conditional node.  
NOTE: A workflow process must follow a conditional branch or the  
workflow cannot be saved.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Conditional branch conditions  
Table 2-15. Conditions to Add  
Available For  
PDF Only  
Condition  
1st Qualifier  
2nd Qualifier  
Number of Impressions*  
Number of Pages  
Mediabox Width  
Mediabox Height  
Trimbox Width  
Equal to  
Not equal to  
Less than or equal to  
Greater than  
Make a numeric  
selection  
Trimbox Height  
Bleedbox Height  
Bleedbox Width  
Artbox Height  
Artbox Width  
Cropbox Height  
Cropbox Width  
Maximum Bleed Size*  
Author  
Title  
Subject  
Keyword  
Creator  
Producer  
Contains  
Enter text  
Does not contain  
Starts with  
Ends with  
Is equal to  
Color or B&W  
All B&W  
Containing any grayscale  
or color images  
None  
None  
First Page Orientation  
Portrait  
Landscape  
All Page Orientations Same  
All Page Sizes Equal  
Yes  
No  
Customer Billing Code  
Customer ID  
Customer Job Name  
Customer Order ID  
Contains  
Enter text  
Enter text  
JDF Job  
Ticket Only  
Does not contain  
Starts with  
Ends with  
Is equal to  
Job name  
File Extension  
Contains  
Always  
Does not contain  
Starts with  
Ends with  
Is equal to  
Number of Copies*  
Equal to  
Not equal to  
Make a numeric  
selection  
Less than or equal to  
Greater than  
* For more information, see Condition Definitions  
2-128  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
Condition Definitions  
For a list of available conditions and their qualifiers, see  
Number of copies  
The value that a Conditional Branching node uses for the “number  
of copies” condition is the copy count value associated with the job  
at the time of Conditional branching execution. Regardless of how  
a job was submitted (through submission client, Hot Folder,  
Manifest), if there is a copy count value associated with the job,  
that is the value that the Conditional Branching node will use at  
execution time for the number of copies condition.  
A copy count value is associated with a job through the following  
ways:  
If an XPIF ticket was submitted with the Job (for example as  
part of an RDO) and it has a copy count value, that value will  
be considered the Job copy count value.  
If a JDF ticket was submitted with the job and it has a copy  
count value, that value will be considered the Job copy count  
value.  
If the user sets a value for the “Quantity” attribute in FreeFlow  
Process Manager MAX, Manifest Automation from Xerox, that  
value is considered the Job copy count value.  
If the user sets a copy count value during Review in Job  
Manager, that value is considered the Job Copy count value  
from that point on.  
If “Imposition affects copy count switch” is set in the WorkFlow  
Builder, and the copy count value has been modified by  
Imposition, once the job reaches the Conditional branching  
node, the modified value is considered the Job copy count  
value for Conditional Branching. For more information, see To  
If the job has no associated copy count value, Conditional  
branching fails when it examines the number of copies condition.  
A message saying “no copy count value is available” message  
displays.  
NOTE: Printer copy count value is not the same as Job copy  
count value. The “number of copies” condition of Conditional  
branching works independently of the Print nodes in a workflow  
and the copy count values, if any, set during workflow design.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Number of impressions  
This is the number of copies multiplied by number of pages in PDF  
file.  
Maximum bleed size  
If a Trim Box and a Bleed Box are defined, and the Trim Box is  
contained within the Bleed Box, then the Bleed size is the four  
offsets from the four sides of the Bleed Box to the four sides of the  
Trim Box, and the Maximum Bleed size is the greatest of the four.  
2-130  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Managing conditional branches  
The Conditional Branch Settings [Name] dialog allows you to:  
View and manage existing branches for the selected  
Conditional node.  
Access the Branch Conditions dialog to create and configure  
new conditional branches.  
To manage a conditional branch  
1. In Workflow Builder, double-click a Conditional process in the  
workflow to open the Conditional Branch Settings dialog.  
2. Select a workflow branch.  
3. Select from the following options to view, manage, and create  
conditional branches:  
Conditional Set Description pane: Lists the conditions  
that must be met for the selected workflow branch.  
Up arrow: Moves the selected workflow branch up one  
level of order.  
Down arrow: Moves the selected workflow branch down  
one level of order.  
NOTE: Branches are processed from top to bottom. The first  
branch conditions are checked and, if met, the branch is taken.  
If not met, the next branch is checked, and so on.  
View/Edit...: Opens the Branch Conditions dialog for the  
selected workflow branch. See Adding and configuring  
Delete: Removes the selected workflow branch with a  
confirmation dialog.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Include pass-through branch with no conditions:  
Active if 11 or fewer branches are defined. Adds a branch  
to the workflow branch list called “pass-through.” This  
branch is not selectable in the list and has no conditions  
associated with it. It accepts all documents that could not  
be passed to prior order branches. Unmark the check-box  
to delete the pass-through branch.  
NOTE: The system automatically sequences the pass-through  
branch as the last branch.  
New Branch…: Opens the Branch Conditions dialog for  
creating a new branch. See Adding and configuring  
See also:  
2-132  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Editing conditional branches  
You may wish to view and/or edit a conditional branch.  
To edit a conditional branch  
1. In Workflow Builder, double-click a Conditional node in a  
workflow.  
2. In the Conditional Branch Settings dialog, select the desired  
workflow branch from the list, and then select [View/Edit...].  
3. In the Branch Conditions [Name] dialog, make the desired  
4. Select [OK].  
5. In the Conditional Branch Settings dialog, make any additional  
6. Select [OK].  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Deleting conditional branches  
You may wish to remove a conditional branch.  
To delete a conditional branch  
1. In Workflow Builder, double-click a Conditional node in a  
workflow.  
2. In the Conditional Branch Settings dialog, select the desired  
workflow branch from the list.  
3. Select [Delete].  
4. In the Delete confirmation dialog, select [Yes].  
5. Select [OK].  
6. To delete a pass-through branch, unmark the check-box for  
“Include pass-through branch with no conditions.  
See also:  
2-134  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Linking conditional branches  
The branches of a Conditional node can be merged into a  
common workflow once they have been processed. Follow these  
rules:  
If a link is used, all of the branches of a Conditional node must  
merge.  
The branches of one conditional node cannot merge with  
branches of another Conditional node.  
To link conditional branches  
1. Right-click the Conditional node to which you wish to add a  
link.  
2. Select [Create Common Links]. Links display at the end of  
the branches for that node. Another link displays beneath the  
first workflow, creating a common workflow.  
3. Drag and drop the necessary workflow processes into the  
common workflow to continue processing the job.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Configuring external process settings  
Process Manager allows you to configure up to 5 external  
processes, from any third party software that supports hot folders,  
to use as process options in Workflow Builder. First, set up the  
profiles for each external process in Workflow Job Manager. Then,  
in Workflow Builder, use the [Process Name] Settings dialog to:  
Designate from which profiles users can select.  
Select the default profile.  
External Processes are indicated either by a plus symbol and a  
curved arrow or, if the user chooses an existing process icon, by a  
plus symbol overlay.  
To configure external process settings  
1. Double-click an external process in a workflow to access the  
[Process Name] Settings dialog.  
2. In the “Select the profiles that submitters can choose from” text  
box, select the desired profiles. The profiles will populate the  
“Select the default profile” drop box.  
3. In the “Select the default profile” drop box, select a default  
profile.  
4. Select [Always use these settings] to prevent users from  
modifying the settings. The settings will appear in the  
Workflow Submission Client controls, but will be grayed out  
and unchangeable.  
5. Select [OK] to accept changes and close the window.  
2-136  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Setting up repository credentials  
Repository credentials are used in all transactions that require  
logging into a repository in FreeFlow Process Manager. This  
includes:  
[Add Repository File] in Workflow Submission Client.  
[Browse Repository...] in the Save and JDF export nodes.  
Hot folders When you create a hot folder, you must specify  
the “Submitting user” whose repository credentials are  
associated with the hot folder: either a member of the Process  
Manager Administrator group or a member of the Operators  
group. This informs the system whose repository credentials to  
use when a job must access a repository during hot folder  
submission.  
Resubmit operation in Workflow Job Manager.  
Prior to performing operations that require repository access, you  
must set up and save your repository credentials in FreeFlow  
Process Manager. Credentials are set up and saved per user.  
Once a user has RMS credentials saved, all future repository  
transactions by that user through the Workflow Builder, Workflow  
Submission Client, or Workflow Job Manager use the same saved  
RMS credentials.  
Before setting up repository credentials in FreeFlow Process  
Manager, you must have previously:  
Set up an account on the repository.  
Set up a link between the desired repository and FreeFlow  
Process Manager via the FreeFlow Administration Tool.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
To set up repository credentials  
1. In Workflow Builder, Workflow Submission Client, or Workflow  
Job Manager, select [Options: Repository Credentials  
Setup...] to open the Repository Credentials Setup dialog.  
2. Enter the following repository account credentials:  
User name  
Password  
3. Re-enter the password to confirm it.  
4. Select [Save]. The credentials are saved and you are not  
prompted for them again. To change repository credentials,  
you must open the repository credentials dialog, as described  
in step 1.  
Ensuring success with repository credentials  
The following examples illustrate the importance of setting up  
repository credentials before submitting jobs.  
If you do not enter repository credentials, upon clicking [Add  
Repository File] in Workflow Submission Client or [Browse  
Repository] in the Save or JDF Export settings dialogs, the  
Repository Credentials Setup dialog automatically displays.  
If a logged in user, without saved repository credentials,  
submits a job via Workflow Submission Client to a workflow  
with a Save or JDF Export node, the job will fail during the  
Save or JDF Export operation, if those nodes interact with the  
repository.  
During the resubmit operation in Workflow Job Manager, if  
there is interaction with a repository, the RMS credentials of  
the current user (the user running Workflow Job Manager) are  
used. If the current user of Workflow Job Manager does not  
have proper RMS credentials saved, the job will fail during  
resubmit.  
For Hot Folder job submission, if the submitting user selected  
during Hot Folder setup does not have RMS credentials  
saved, and the job needs to interact with Repository, the job  
will fail.  
2-138  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Checking the status of a process  
The Processes dialog lists information about each process,  
including:  
Name  
Status  
Concurrent count  
Take Offline/Set Online: Allows you to change the offline or  
online status of a selected process; pauses jobs that reach the  
process. Available if no jobs are using the process. The option  
displays as a context menu option when you right-click a process.  
Settings: Opens the Process Settings dialog.  
To change the offline or online status of a process  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: Processes] to display  
the Processes dialog.  
2. Select a process and select [Take Offline/Set Online] to  
change the status.  
3. Close the Processes dialog.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
Setting the number of concurrent processes and the copy count divisor  
The Process Settings for the [Process] dialog allows you to:  
Select the number of concurrent processes. This sets the  
number of instances of a process that can be used to  
concurrently process jobs.  
Place the process online or offline.  
Turn the copy count divisor functionality on or off, available for  
Imposition only.  
To set the number of concurrent processes  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: Processes] to display  
the Processes dialog.  
2. Select a process, then select [Settings] to open the Process  
Settings for [Process] dialog.  
3. Select the number of concurrent processes, from 1-4.  
4. As appropriate, select or deselect the check box to place the  
process online.  
5. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the Process  
Settings for [Process] dialog.  
6. Close the Processes dialog.  
See also:  
2-140  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Builder  
To enable the Copy Count Divisor  
You can enable the system to adjust the copy count to maintain  
the original quantity intent for workflows that contain multiple-up  
impositions. The value is changed to output the original quantity of  
the original document given that the imposition node has changed  
the PDF document to contain multiple instances of the original  
document.  
In the Job Manager Copy Count and the Print node Job Setup  
dialogs, the quantity value is modified when you:  
Process the job through a Xerox imposition node (not PREPS)  
that is multi-up repeated.  
Enable the Copy Count Divisor switch.  
Submit a job with a job ticket quantity intent.  
Use Print nodes that do not have “Always use these settings”  
selected.  
Example: If the original document is 1 page, the original quantity  
is 100 copies, and the imposition is 4-up repeated, then the post  
imposition copy count quantity will be 25, since each copy of the  
imposed document now contains 4 copies of the original  
document.  
If there is a JDF Export node in the workflow, the JDF ticket  
created through the JDF export node does not include the  
modified copy count.  
See also:  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: Processes] to display  
the Processes dialog.  
2. Select the Impose process, then select [Settings] to open the  
Impose Process Settings dialog.  
3. Mark the check box for [Imposition affects copy count].  
4. As appropriate, select or deselect the check box to place the  
process online.  
5. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the Process  
Settings for [Process] dialog.  
6. Close the Processes dialog.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Copy Count Divisor examples  
The following examples illustrate various uses of the Copy Count  
Divisor:  
Example 1: Original quantity is 20 with 2-up; actual  
copies =10  
1. The user sets the Copy Count Divisor switch to On.  
2. The user creates a workflow with the following nodes:  
Imposition (2up; Always use these settings is set);  
Print (Always use these settings is not set)  
3. User submits a job with an XPIF ticket: Copies: 20  
4. The job successfully goes through the Imposition node.  
5. The job prints 10 actual copies of the imposed document.  
Example 2: Original quantity is 20 with 2-up + 2-up;  
actual copies = 5  
1. The user sets the Copy Count Divisor switch to On.  
2. The user creates a workflow with the following nodes:  
Imposition (2up; Always use these settings is set)  
Imposition (2up; Always use these settings is set)  
Print (Always use these settings is not set)  
3. User submits a job with an XPIF ticket: Copies: 20  
4. The job successfully goes through the two Imposition nodes.  
5. The job prints 5 actual copies of the imposed document.  
Example 3: Original quantity is 20 with 2-up; observe  
changes to Print quantity settings  
1. The user sets the Copy Count Divisor switch to On.  
2. The user creates a workflow with the following nodes:  
Review  
Imposition (2up; Always use these settings is set)  
Review  
Print (Always use these settings is not set)  
3. User submits a job with an XPIF ticket: Copies: 20  
4. At the first Review the user opens the Copy Count Dialog.  
They will see: Quantity (original document):20  
5. At the first Review the user looks at the Print task setting. They  
will see: Quantity: 20  
2-142  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
6. After the job passes successfully through the Imposition node,  
the user opens the Copy Count dialog at the second Review.  
They see:  
Quantity (original document): 20  
Quantity (imposed document): 10  
7. At the second Review the user looks at the Print task setting.  
They see: Quantity: 10  
8. The job prints 10 actual copies of the imposed document.  
Example 4: Original quantity is 20 with 2-up + 2-up;  
quantity modifed after first Imposition; actual copies = 6  
1. The user sets the Copy Count Divisor switch to On.  
2. User creates a workflow with the following nodes:  
Imposition (2up; Always use these settings is set)  
Review  
Imposition (2up; Always use these settings is set)  
Review  
Print (Always use these settings is not set)  
3. User submits a job with an XPIF ticket: Copies=20  
4. After successful execution of the first Imposition, at the first  
Review, the user opens the Copy Count Dialog. The user  
sees:  
Quantity (original document): 20  
Quantity (imposed document): 10  
5. The User modifies the Quantity (imposed document) value in  
the Copy Count Dialog to 12:  
Quantity (original document): 20  
Quantity (imposed document): 12  
6. After successful execution of the second Imposition, at the  
second Review, the user opens the Copy Count Dialog. They  
see: Quantity (original document): 20  
7. Quantity (imposed document): 6. Since the user modified this  
value at the first Review, the second Imposition node takes the  
modified value and applies the copy count divisor logic.  
8. The job prints 6 actual copies of the imposed document.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Example 5: Modified quantity ignored/overwritten  
1. The user sets the Copy Count Divisor switch to On.  
2. User creates a workflow with these nodes:  
Review  
Imposition (2up; Always use these settings is set)  
Print (Always use these settings is not set)  
3. User submits a job with an XPIF ticket: Copies: 20  
4. At the Review node the user brings up the Copy Count dialog.  
They will see: Quantity: 20  
5. The user closes the Copy Count Dialog and opens the Print  
task setting.  
6. The user sets the Quantity value in Print task setting to 18,  
closes the dialog and continues executing the job.  
7. The job successfully executes the Imposition node.  
8. The job prints 10 actual copies of the imposed document.  
The Quantity value entered at the Print task setting was  
ignored and overwritten once the job went through the  
Imposition node. When the divisor logic switch is on and there  
are imposition(s) nodes in the workflow, if the user wants to  
modify the quantity of the imposed document during the  
Review task of Job Manager, they should do it through the  
Copy Count dialog to ensure that the value will not be ignored  
and overwritten.  
2-144  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Checking the status of a workflow  
The Workflows dialog provides the following information about the  
listed workflows:  
Hot Folders button: Opens the Hot Folders dialog.  
Name: Lists the names of workflows.  
Workflow Id: Lists the system-generated workflow Id.  
Status: Lists the following status of the workflows:  
Enabled - Busy  
Enabled  
Disabled - Busy  
Disabled  
Active Jobs: Lists the number of active jobs.  
Hot Folders: Lists the number of hot folders associated with the  
selected workflow.  
Description: Lists the description text for the workflows.  
Processes: Displays the small icon processes for the workflows.  
NOTE 1:You can double-click a workflow to open the Hot Folder  
Setup dialog.  
NOTE 2:You can right-click in the window to display the context  
menu.  
Status text (bottom of screen): Lists the total number of  
workflows.  
To check the status of a workflow  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: Workflows].  
2. View the information about the desired workflow.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
About hot folders  
The hot folder function allows you to designate one or more  
folders on your system to be monitored, at set intervals, by the  
Process Manager application. When a file is detected in a hot  
folder, it is automatically submitted to the workflow associated with  
that hot folder.  
See Also:  
Hot folders and Join  
To process multiple files as a single joined file, you can:  
Use a Zip file to submit the jobs to a hot folder.  
Submit an .xml workflow with a folder to a dynamic workflow.  
Submit an .xml workflow with a Zip file to a dynamic workflow.  
If you do not use these methods to submit multiple files to a hot  
folder, each file is processed as a separate job, even if the  
associated workflow contains a Join task.  
See also:  
2-146  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Builder  
Hot folders and RDOs  
Use File Manager, Document Library, Makeready, or Web  
Services to copy or move RDO documents into a hot folder,  
otherwise, the RDO may be corrupted. The hot folder checks  
RDOs for readiness to ensure that both the RDO and .CON  
directory are present. If the RDO is not ready, it is checked at the  
next interval.  
Hot folders and linked RDOs  
Successful submission of linked RDOs (an RDO containing a link  
to another RDO) and set labeling RDOs via Workflow Submission  
Client or hot folders cannot be assured.  
Limitations for hot folder submission of RDOs and job files  
associated with .xpf or .xml files  
To ensure better processing, when submitting RDOs to a hot  
folder, the user should ensure that all contents inside the .CON  
are copied over, before copying the RDO file.  
When submitting subdirectories that contain job files associated  
with either .xpf files or .xml files, the user should copy the  
directories first, and wait until the files are copied -- if there are  
RDOs inside the subdirectory, make sure that they are copied  
over, as well -- before dropping the .xpf or .xml file into the hot  
folder.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
Hot folders and Zip files  
A hot folder can unzip a Zip file containing multiple PDFs or mixed  
file formats.  
To process multiple files as a single joined job: Submit the Zip  
file to a hot folder associated with a workflow that has a Join task.  
Files are joined in the order they were added to the Zip file.  
Hot folders can process Zip files that contain all supported file  
types.  
Hot folders support the following Zip file formats:  
Microsoft Windows Compressed (zipped) files packaged with  
Windows Server 2003  
WinZip 7.0 and 8.0 zipped files  
Hot folders do not support:  
Folders inside a Zip file, except for .CON directories when a  
matching .rdo is present. Folders inside the Zip file are  
unzipped but are not submitted.  
Nested Zip files (a Zip file within a Zip file)  
Files for which, when unzipped, there is not enough room on  
the drive. If problems occur, the file is moved to the error  
folder.  
2-148  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
The following limitations apply to InfoZip files:  
Table 2-16. InfoZip file limitations  
Item  
Limit  
Number of files  
64 K  
Uncompressed  
size of a single  
file  
4 GB  
Compressed size 4 GB  
of a single file  
Total size of  
archive  
256 TB  
Maximum path/  
filename length  
(characters)  
DOS: 256  
Unix: 1024  
CD-ROM 8 level sub directory;  
depending on the type of file system  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Hot folders and JDF  
Job Definition Format (JDF) job tickets can be submitted only via a  
hot folder. JDF is a universal job ticket format. JDF capabilities  
enable Process Manager to use existing JDF job tickets and to  
create new JDF job tickets. The JDF job ticket is created with a  
third party submission tool.  
The following workflow processes support JDF:  
Optimize  
Convert  
Join  
Print  
Impose  
The workflow processes currently support two types of JDF Intent:  
Business card  
Saddle stitch  
NOTE: If a JDF ticket does not contain the correct file path to the  
job that is being processed, the job fails.  
JDF files take precedence over other files types; they are  
processed first.  
Hot folders and error checking  
Non-supported file types are moved to an Unsupported Files  
folder within the hot folder. It is the user’s responsibility to  
manually delete these files from the folder.  
Hot folders: supported files  
The hot folder supports the same files that are supported through  
the Workflow Submission Client: Adobe Illustrator CS, Adobe  
InDesign CS, Adobe Photoshop (currently supported version),  
Bitmap, JPG, JPEG, Microsoft Office 2007, Microsoft Publisher  
(Excel, PowerPoint, and Word), PDF, RDO,TIFF, TIFF-IT, VPC,  
QXD, EPS and PS.  
Hot folders and read-only files  
Read-only files are not picked up by the hot folder.  
2-150  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Builder  
Hot folders on mapped or shared drives and resources  
To work properly, full access for the hot folder must be granted to  
XDL_ADMIN, particularly if the hot folder is on a mapped drive.  
XDL_ADMIN passwords must match client and server.  
Hot Folder submission with and without the Unlimited User  
Conversion License  
If you do not have the Unlimited User Conversion or the 100 User  
license, and you are submitting an image file via a hot folder:  
The file attachment is sent as high resolution and can be  
viewed, but not printed or edited.  
For saved/encrypted files from FreeFlow 5.0, PDF encryption  
is removed when you save via a Save or JDF export node, or  
when you view the PDF via the Review node.  
See also:  
Limitations when setting up directories as input/output hot  
folders for more than one feature  
Within Process Manager, users can set up directories as input/  
output hot folders for Process Manager Hot Folders (for job  
submission), QuarkXPress file conversion, and Third party  
external processes. When setting up a directory as an input or  
output hot folder, make sure that it is not being used as a hot  
folder for either of the other two features, by visiting their  
corresponding dialogs.  
The system does not currently perform conflict checking across  
these different features.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Builder  
Managing hot folders  
The Hot Folders dialog allows you to manage existing hot folders,  
or to access dialogs to set up new hot folders and modify existing  
hot folders.  
It lists the hot folder name, the workflow associated with the hot  
folder, the full file location path for the hot folder, the assigned  
submitter’s name, the clustering number of files before submission  
and the scheduled times of day to activate.  
NOTE: Only one workflow can be associated with a hot folder.  
However, several hot folders can be associated with the same  
workflow.  
The Hot Folders dialog options include:  
New: Opens the New Hot Folder dialog.  
Modify: Opens the Hot Folder dialog for the selected hot folder.  
Delete: Deletes the selected hot folder. Also available as a  
context menu by right-clicking an item listed in the Hot Folders  
window.  
Pause: When selected, the hot folder mechanism processes all  
files currently in the selected hot folder. It stops scanning for new  
files after all current files are processed. The button toggles  
between the pause and resume states.  
Resume: When selected, the hot folder mechanism resumes  
monitoring the selected hot folder at the defined interval. The  
button toggles between the pause and resume states.  
Settings...: Opens the Hot Folder System Settings dialog.  
Stop/Start: Allows you to stop/start the hot folder services,  
effectively pausing/resuming all hot folders at once.  
2-152  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Status line: (bottom of screen) Lists the total number of hot  
folders, the Processing or Paused status, and the monitoring  
interval.  
See also:  
To manage hot folders  
You can use the Hot Folders dialog to manage hot folders  
independently of workflows.  
1. Select [Options: Hot Folders], or right-click a workflow listed  
in the Workflows dialog.  
2. Perform the necessary actions.  
3. Close the Hot Folders dialog.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Setting up or modifying a hot folder  
The New Hot Folder or Hot Folder (for modifying a hot folder)  
dialogs contain the following options:  
Hot folder location: Lists the full file location path for the hot  
folder associated with the selected workflow.  
Browse: Opens a common browse folder dialog and allows you to  
select or create a folder in the system.  
Target Workflow: Lists all workflows in the system. The list  
reflects the sort order of the Workflows dialog.  
Submitted with documents: This option, in the Target Workflow  
drop down menu, supports the hot folder submission of .xml  
workflows that have been exported from the Workflow Builder  
application. For more information, see Submitting .xml workflow  
Submitting User: Allows you to a specify the user whose  
repository credentials will be associated with the hot folder: either  
a member of the Process Manager Administrator group or a  
member of the Operators group. This informs the system whose  
credentials to use when a job must access a repository during hot  
folder submission.  
NOTE: If the submitting user does not have saved repository  
credentials, the job will fail if attempting to access a repository  
during hot folder submission. For more information, see Setting up  
The following options are available when Enable file clustering,  
Enable hot folder scheduling, and Set scheduled times for hot  
folders individually are selected in the Hot Folder System  
Settings dialog:  
Enable file clustering for this hot folder: Enables the system to  
wait until the specified number of files are placed in the hot folder  
before processing them.  
Number of files: Allows you to specify the minimum number of  
files before processing is initiated on the set. The default is 2; the  
maximum is 100.  
2-154  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Enable scheduling for this hot folder: Enables the scheduling  
functions:  
Time of Day: Allows you to specify the times during the day  
that you want the hot folder scanned. The default is 12:00 AM.  
Add: Available if Enable scheduling for this hot folder is  
selected. Adds the selected time of day to the list. If you try to  
add a time more than once, the “Time Already Added”  
message displays.  
Scheduled times: Available if Enable scheduling for this  
hot folder is selected. Lists the times during a day when the  
hot folder system scans the hot folder for files. A maximum of  
10 polling times can be set.  
NOTE: Intervals between polling times cannot be smaller than  
the hot folder scan interval.  
Remove: Removes the select time from the list.  
OK: Closes the dialog and saves the settings.  
Cancel: Closes the dialog and does not save the settings.  
Waiting for Job Ticket folder: Each hot folder contains a Waiting  
for Job Ticket folder. When submitting .xpf job tickets with a job  
file, both items must be placed into this folder. For more  
To set up or modify a hot folder  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: Hot Folders]. The Hot  
Folders dialog displays.  
2. Select the desired options in the Hot Folder System Settings  
3. Select [New...] or [Modify..].  
4. Select [Browse...].  
NOTE: To work properly, full access for the hot folder must be  
granted to XDL_ADMIN, particularly, if the hot folder is located on  
a mapped drive.  
5. In the Browse for Folder window, do one of the following:  
Select a folder, then select [OK]; or  
Select [Make New Folder]. Right-click the new folder and  
select [Rename] in the context menu. Type a folder name,  
and then select [OK].  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
6. In the Target Workflow drop down list, select a workflow.  
Ensure that the workflow contains the process steps  
necessary to support the job.  
7. In the Submitting User drop down list, specify the user whose  
repository credentials will be associated with the hot folder.  
8. If required, select [Enable file clustering for this hot folder]  
to enable the system to wait for the minimum number of files  
before submitting them to the hot folder. This option is  
available when Enable file clustering is selected in the Hot  
Folder System Settings dialog.  
Specify the number of files.  
9. If required, select Enable scheduling for this hot folder,  
available when Enable hot folder scheduling, and Set  
scheduled times for hot folders individually are selected in  
the Hot Folder System Settings dialog.  
In the Time of Day area, highlight minutes or hours and  
click to specify the time during the day that you want the  
hot folder scanned.  
Select [Add] to display the designated time of day on the  
Scheduled times list. A maximum of 10 scheduled times  
can be set.  
If required, in the Scheduled times area, select a time and  
select [Remove] to delete the time from the list.  
10. Select [OK] to accept the changes and close the dialog.  
11. Close the Hot Folders window.  
See also:  
2-156  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Deleting a hot folder  
This option is available when a hot folder is not paused.  
To delete a hot folder  
1. Workflow Builder, select [Options: Hot Folders].  
2. Select a hot folder.  
3. Select [Delete], and then select [Yes] to confirm the deletion.  
4. Close the Hot Folders window.  
Pausing and resuming hot folder monitoring  
The hot folder monitoring function can be paused in order to  
perform any necessary actions.  
To pause and resume hot folder monitoring  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: Hot Folders].  
2. Select a hot folder from the list and select [Pause].  
3. When appropriate, select [Resume].  
4. Close the Hot Folders dialog.  
Stopping and starting all hot folder monitoring  
The hot folder monitoring function can be paused for the entire hot  
folder service in order to perform any necessary actions.  
To start and stop all hot folder monitoring  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: Hot Folders].  
2. Select [Stop].  
3. When appropriate, select [Start].  
4. Close the Hot Folders dialog.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Builder  
Configuring the hot folder system settings  
The Hot Folder System Settings dialog allows you to set the scan  
interval, to enable file clustering, and to select between scheduling  
all hot folders for the same times of day or scheduling hot folders  
individually. It contains the following options:  
Scan Interval: Sets the time between system scans of the hot  
folders for new files. The default interval is 10 seconds. The  
available range is 10 – 100 seconds. Workflows are submitted as  
files are found, unless clustering or scheduling is enabled.  
Enable file clustering: Enables the system to wait until the  
specified number of files are placed in the hot folder before  
processing them. The number is set on a per hot folder basis. If  
selected, the scan interval is set to 10 seconds and grayed out.  
Enable hot folder scheduling: Enables the scheduling function.  
NOTE: The clustering and scheduling options each have the  
ability to invoke the system to submit jobs independent of the  
other’s settings. If both clustering and scheduling are selected,  
then reaching either the clustering number of files or the  
scheduled time results in the submission of hot folder files as  
workflow jobs.  
Set scheduled times for each hot folder individually: Allows  
you to specify times on a per hot folder basis. See Setting up or  
Use the following scheduled times for all hot folders: Allows  
you to specify times for all hot folders. When selected, the  
following options are available:  
Time of Day: Allows you to specify the times during the day  
that you want all hot folders scanned. The default is 12:00 AM.  
Add: Adds the selected time of day to the list. If you try to add  
a time more than once, the “Time Already Added” message  
displays.  
Scheduled times: Lists the times during a day when the hot  
folder system scans all hot folders for files. A maximum of 10  
scheduling times can be set.  
NOTE: Intervals between polling times cannot be smaller than  
the hot folder scan interval.  
Remove: Available if the “Schedule daily times...” check box is  
selected and a time in the list is selected. Removes the listed  
time.  
OK: Closes the dialog and saves the settings.  
Cancel: Closes the dialog and does not save the settings.  
2-158  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
To configure the hot folder system settings  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: Hot Folders].  
2. Select [Settings...].  
3. Set the desired interval, from 10 to 100. Available if Enable  
clustering and Enable hot folder scheduling are not  
selected.  
4. If required, select Enable file clustering to wait for a minimum  
number of files before processing.  
5. If required, select Enable hot folder scheduling to enable the  
scheduling function.  
6. Select Set scheduled times for each hot folder individually  
to specify times that you want hot folders scanned on a per hot  
folder basis.  
7. Select Use the following scheduled times for all hot  
folders to specify times for all hot folders, and then schedule  
or remove the desired scheduling times:  
Click to set the time of day and select [Add], or  
Select a time of day from the Scheduled times list and  
select [Remove].  
8. Close the Hot Folder System Settings dialog and the Hot  
Folders dialog.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Submitting a job to a hot folder  
Points to remember when submitting a job to a hot folder:  
Jobs submitted with a job ticket must be placed, with the job  
ticket, into the Waiting for Job Ticket folder, inside the hot  
folder.  
RDO files can be submitted to a hot folder via File Manager  
and Web Services.  
If a JDF ticket does not contain the correct file path for the file  
that is being processed, the job fails.  
When submitting a Zip file to a workflow with Join task, the  
files within the Zip file will be joined in the order that they were  
added to the Zip file.  
Read-only files are not picked up by a hot folder.  
To submit a job to a hot folder  
1. Locate the desired file using Windows Explorer.  
2. Use Windows Explorer to copy, move, paste, or drag and drop  
the file into the appropriate hot folder. The submission is  
automatically processed.  
NOTE: If you move a file into a hot folder, you will not be able to  
retrieve it. The system automatically deletes the files from the hot  
folder. Copy the file if you need to retrieve it.  
See also:  
2-160  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Submitting an RDO to a hot folder  
CAUTION: If you are submitting an RDO to a hot folder, do  
not open, copy, move, delete, or rename an RDO document  
using Windows Explorer. You will corrupt the document.  
To submit an RDO to a hot folder  
1. Select [Start: Programs: Xerox FreeFlow Software: File  
Manager].  
NOTE: To submit files to a hot folder, you can also use legacy  
Document Library if you have a FreeFlow Process Manager  
upgrade, or you can use Web Services.  
2. In File Manager, navigate to the appropriate RDO.  
NOTE: In File Manager, the .CON file is not visible.  
3. Right-click the file. In the context menu, select [Copy].  
4. In the Copy dialog, select [To]. Type the path to the desired  
hot folder, for example, C:\Documents and  
Settings\Administrator\Desktop\RDO Hot Folder.  
NOTE: To display the path to the desired hot folder, select  
[Options: Hot Folder] and locate the hot folder path.  
5. Select [OK]. The file is automatically submitted to the workflow  
associated with the hot folder.  
If either the RDO or the .CON folder is missing from the hot folder,  
the file will not be processed. You must then manually delete the  
file from the hot folder.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Submitting a job ticket file (*.xpf) to a hot folder for reprinting  
You can save an .xpf job ticket file with the PDF file for reprinting  
purposes by including a Save process in a workflow and selecting  
[Save job ticket information] in the Save Settings dialog.  
For more information about creating the job ticket file, refer to the  
topic “Saving a job ticket with the PDF for reprinting” in the  
Workflow Builder section.  
NOTE: You can also create the job ticket with FreeFlow Print  
Manager Advanced Print Path.  
To associate the .xpf job ticket file with the files to be picked up by  
the hot folder for processing, the .xpf job ticket file is automatically  
saved along with the PDF file, in the location designated in the  
Save settings, using the following naming conventions:  
File name: <file name>.<file ext>  
.xpf job ticket name: <file name>.<file ext>.xpf  
When submitting files in a folder, the following naming  
conventions are used:  
Folder name: <folder name>  
.xpf job ticket name: <folder name>.xpf  
NOTE: If you are not using a hot folder for submission, you can  
submit only the saved PDF to a reprint workflow. The .xpf  
associated with the file is automatically picked up and applied.  
To submit an .xpf job ticket to a hot folder for reprinting  
Waiting for Job Ticket folder: The job file and its associated .xpf  
must be placed in the Waiting for Job Ticket folder inside the hot  
folder.  
When an .xpf job ticket is submitted to the hot folder’s Waiting for  
Job Ticket folder, with an associated job file, the job ticket is  
applied to all the print nodes in the workflow associated with the  
hot folder.  
1. Locate the saved PDF. The PDF is in the location that was  
designated in the Save settings when the job was initially  
processed.  
2-162  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
2. Locate the associated .xpf job ticket. The .xpf should be in the  
same location as the PDF, and the associated .xpf file name  
should match the PDF. For example:  
File name = newsletter.pdf  
Job ticket name = newsletter.pdf.xpf  
3. Do one of the following:  
For a file: Drag and drop or copy and paste the file to be  
processed and its associated .xpf into the Waiting for Job  
Ticket folder inside the hot folder.  
NOTE: To reprint via Workflow Submission Client, submit only  
the saved PDF file to the reprint workflow. Process Manager  
automatically picks up the associated job ticket and applies it  
to all print nodes in the workflow.  
For a folder: Drag and drop or copy and paste the folder  
to be processed and its associated .xpf into the Waiting for  
Job Ticket folder inside the hot folder. The .xpf file must be  
outside the folder to be processed. Each file in the folder is  
submitted separately as a single job with the job ticket.  
4. The job prints using the job ticket.  
NOTE: If the Print node has “Always use these settings” selected,  
the Print node setting overwrites the .xpf job ticket; otherwise, the  
.xpf job ticket overwrites the Print node settings.  
Error conditions  
JDF is a “job ticket” and cannot be associated with an .xpf.  
Since RDO files already contain an internal job ticket, any  
associated .xpf file and the RDO are moved to the  
Unsupported Files folder.  
If the .xpf ticket is invalid, the .xpf file and the associated  
document are moved to the Unsupported Files folder.  
.xpf files without any associated document are ignored.  
.xpf files placed in the hot folder outside the Waiting for Job  
Ticket folder, are moved to the Unsupported Files folder.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Imposition handling with .xpf tickets  
If the .xpf ticket contains Imposition information and the  
workflow contains Imposition nodes, imposition information is  
applied to the first imposition node automatically.  
If the Imposition node has “Always use these settings”  
selected, the Imposition node settings overwrite the .xpf ticket;  
otherwise, the .xpf ticket overwrites the Imposition node  
settings.  
If the .xpf ticket contains any imposition information and the  
workflow does not contain any imposition node, the imposition  
information is ignored.  
Submitting .xml workflow files to a hot folder  
This feature allows you to submit exported workflow(s) in xml  
format, with either a file or a folder containing several files, to a hot  
folder.  
The .xml file name must match the name of its associated file or  
folder to be picked up for hot folder processing.  
Dynamic workflows: Files are submitted to a dynamically  
created “Submitted with documents” workflow, which is available  
in the target workflow drop box. Each time a new job is submitted  
to a dynamic workflow, a new workflow, with a unique workflow Id,  
is created. Dynamic workflows are not visible and are deleted from  
the Process Manager database when jobs using the workflows are  
deleted. Data from the dynamically created workflow is available  
for accounting information, but the “Submitted with documents”  
workflow does not contain any accounting info.  
Matching file names: The .xml must be named <filename>.<file  
ext>.xml to be associated with <filename>.<file ext>.  
Matching folder names: The .xml must be named <folder  
name>.xml to be associated with <folder>.  
When submitting a folder to a hot folder, the .xml must be outside  
the submitted folder. Each file in the folder is submitted as a single  
job to each of the workflows in the .xml file.  
2-164  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
To submit .xml workflow files to a hot folder  
1. Create the desired workflow in Workflow Builder.  
2. To create an .xml workflow file, export the workflow. Ensure  
that the .xml file name matches the name of the PDF file or the  
folder that you will be submitting to the workflow. If the  
workflow name does not match, rename it.  
NOTE: The workflow does not need to exist or be enabled in  
Workflow Builder to process the .xml.  
3. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: Hot Folders].  
4. Set up a hot folder using the target workflow “Submitted with  
documents.”  
5. Using Windows Explorer, locate the .xml file and the matching  
file or folder you will be submitting.  
6. Copy, move, paste, or drag and drop the .xml and its matching  
file or folder into the “Submitted with documents” hot folder.  
NOTE: If you are submitting a folder to a hot folder, ensure the  
.xml is outside the folder.  
7. The submission is automatically processed.  
Error conditions for dynamic workflows  
Corrupted RDO’s will not be processed.  
Unsupported file types will be moved to the Unsupported Files  
folder.  
Invalid or unsupported .xml files will be moved to the  
Unsupported Files folder.  
If a workflow contains a print node and a printer is not  
available, the job will fail.  
The following dynamic workflow file names are restricted; files  
will be moved to the Unsupported Files folder:  
Unsupported Files folder.xml  
Waiting for Job Ticket. xml  
Manifest Status.xml  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Submitting .vpc files to a hot folder  
VPC files can be submitted only to workflows containing Review,  
Print, Save, Convert and Impose processes. Jobs submitted to  
workflows with processes other than these will fail.  
VPC file limitations  
Review: Identification of the number of document sets within a  
VI Container is limited to database mode VIPP and PPML print  
files. Selection of a set, or a range of sets is limited to  
database mode VIPP print files. Viewing and editing VI  
containers via Adobe acrobat requires conversion to PDF.  
Convert: Supports conversion of VI Containers with VIPP print  
files. Once the VI container is converted to PDF, the VI job  
remains as a PDF file throughout the remainder of the  
workflow.  
Impose: Supports VI containers converted to PDF  
Preflight: Supports VI containers converted to PDF. Validates  
that all required elements of the VI Container Job are  
contained in the VI Container and that the container is a valid  
VI container. If validation is sucessful the job will pass;  
otherwise, it will fail.  
Print: Limited to DocuSP DFEs.  
2-166  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Using third party external processes  
Administrators can add up to 5 external processes from third party  
software. Each process can have a combined maximum of 10  
folder-based and CLI profiles.  
Submitting from third party processes via hot folders: Folder-  
based profiles allow the submission of jobs from third party  
processes via hot folders. During setup, each profile is assigned to  
a process input hot folder, a process output hot folder, and an  
optional errors hot folder.  
For folder-based profiles, third party software must be installed  
and running on the Process Manager server or a third party  
machine in order to use external processes in a workflow. When  
the Process Manager workflow reaches the third party step, the  
job is retrieved by the third party application, processed, and then  
returned to the Process Manager workflow to complete any  
remaining workflow steps.  
Running third party scripts: CLI profiles are available for input  
via command line interfaces and scripts. During setup, each  
profile is assigned a file name and location for the script, optional  
parameters, and locations for the input and output files.  
Once an external process is set up, it displays in Workflow  
Process Options area, where the operator can drag it into a  
workflow and select the desired profile.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Guidelines for using third party external processes  
For folder-based profiles, the third party software must support  
input and output via hot folders.  
In addition to PDFs, External Process nodes accommodate all  
supported file types, except RDOs.  
The third party application must accept and send out the same  
types of files. For example, PDF in must result in PDF out. The  
function of the third party software cannot be to convert PDF to  
JPEG.  
The third party application must accept and send out the same  
file name. For example, table.PDF in must result in table.PDF  
out. The function of the third party software cannot be to  
convert table.PDF to door.PDF.  
Users must supply a user name and password when a remote  
location is selected during setup.  
The folder-based, input, output, and error locations must  
reside on the same remote machine or the same local  
machine.  
The CLI profile Script full path, Working directory, and Output  
location (if used) must reside on the same remote machine or  
on the same local machine.  
2-168  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Builder  
Setting up third party input and output hot folders  
For folder-based profiles, to ensure the exchange of files between  
the Process Manager external process and the third party  
software, you must set up input and output hot folders for the third  
party software that match the input and output folders of the profile  
used to execute the external process.  
NOTE: It is your responsibility to ensure that your third party  
software has the proper Windows write access to the folders  
(input folder, output folder, etc.) you create and/or set up during  
the External Process node configuration in Workflow Builder.  
Example  
In Process Manager - The following input and output folders are  
set up in Process Manager for an external process profile called  
Profile 1:  
Process input folder: C:\Profile1In  
Process output folder: C:\Profile1Out  
In the third party software - The following input and output hot  
folder locations must be set up to match the above input and  
output folders for Profile 1:  
Third party input hot folder location is mapped to the Process  
input folder: C:\Profile1In  
Third party output hot folder location is mapped to the Process  
output folder: C:\Profile1Out  
NOTE: The third party software must be running for you to use the  
external process in a workflow.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Managing external processes  
The External Processes dialog allows you to move or delete  
processes and provides access to the external process  
configuration dialogs. It includes the following options:  
Move Left: Moves a selected process one space to the left.  
Move Right: Moves a selected process one space to the right.  
NOTE: Moving a process also changes the order in Workflow  
Builder.  
New Process…: Opens the External Process Setup dialog which  
allows you to add a new external process; available if four or fewer  
processes are configured. If there are already five external  
processes when [New Process...] is selected, the Maximum  
Allowed error dialog displays.  
Edit…: Opens the External Process Setup dialog for the selected  
process. Allows you to edit an external process or to add  
additional profiles to an external process.  
Delete: Deletes a selected process and all its settings.  
See also:  
2-170  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Setting up external processes  
The External Process Setup dialog allows you to set up or edit  
process icons, names, and profiles, or to delete a profile from the  
Process Profiles list. It includes the following options:  
Process icon: Allows you to select an icon.  
Process name: Allows you to enter a name for the external  
process.  
Process profiles: Lists, by name, the existing profiles up to a  
maximum of 10. Listed profiles are selectable.  
Add folder profile...: Available if 9 or fewer profiles are  
configured. Opens the Folder Profile Setup dialog, which allows  
you to enter a new configuration. If there are ten profiles  
configured when [Add] is selected, the Maximum Allowed error  
dialog displays.  
Add CLI profile...: Opens the CLI Profile Setup dialog which  
allows you to enter a new configuration.  
Edit...: Opens the setup dialog for the selected profile.  
Delete: Deletes the selected profile with a confirmation dialog.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Adding or editing an external process  
External processes must be added and configured before they  
can be used in a workflow. Initial configuration involves:  
Selecting a process icon  
Assigning a process name  
Final configuration involves:  
Setting up input, output, and error hot folders for folder-based  
profiles  
Setting up a script location, parameters, a working directory,  
and output location for CLI profiles  
Defining the timeout interval for each profile  
For folder-based profiles, the third party software must be running  
for you to use the external process in a workflow.  
To add or edit an external process  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: External Processes].  
2. In the External Processes dialog, select [New Process...].  
This option is available only if four or fewer processes are  
configured.  
3. In the External Process Setup dialog, select an icon from the  
Process icon drop box.  
NOTE: External Processes are designated by a plus symbol  
overlay.  
4. In the Process name text box, enter a name for the process.  
NOTE 1:The name must be no longer than 14 characters, and it  
must be a unique name.  
NOTE 2:If incorrect file characters (for example, \ / : * ? < >) are  
entered, an error message displays.  
2-172  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
5. Do one of the following:  
a. To add a folder-based profile, select [Add folder  
profile...]. The Folder Profile Setup dialog opens.  
b. To add a CLI profile, select [Add CLI profile...]. The CLI  
Profile Setup dialog opens.  
c. To modify an existing profile, select a profile in the Process  
Profiles list, and select [Edit].  
6. Continue to the appropriate procedure to add or modify a  
folder profile or CLI profile:  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Moving or deleting an external process  
Moving a process changes its position one space to the left or  
right with respect to the other external processes. It also changes  
the process position in Workflow Builder.  
When you delete a process, you delete all the profiles for the  
process.  
To move or delete an external process  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: External Processes].  
2. Select a process and then select from the following:  
[Move Left] or [Move Right] to move the process.  
[Delete] to remove the selected process and all associated  
profiles.  
NOTE: Deleting an external process affects existing workflows.  
3. Select [Close].  
See also:  
2-174  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Setting up folder-based profiles  
The Folder Profile Setup dialog allows you to set up hot folders for  
input, output, and error files, and to define a timeout interval.  
NOTE: Input, output, and error files must be assigned to unique  
locations.  
The dialog includes the following options:  
Profile name: Allows you to enter a name for the profile.  
Input location: Allows you to select a hot folder on a local or  
remote drive for Process Manager to place the files and for the  
third party software to retrieve the files.  
Provide available job data to external process by XML file:  
Allows you to request the system to provide additional information  
to the external process via an XML file written to the external  
process input folder. Information includes job name, job ID, date  
submitted, JDF and preflight results file path information, manifest  
order jacket file information.  
NOTE: The third party application should also be configured to  
retrieve input at this location.  
Output location: Allows you to select a hot folder on a local or  
remote drive for the third party software to store successfully  
processed files.  
NOTE: The third party application should also be configured to  
store successfully processed files at this location.  
Error location: Allows you to select a hot folder for the third party  
software to place error files. If error files are generated, the job will  
fail.  
NOTE: Creating an error file location is optional.  
Timeout: Allows you to enter a duration to wait for the external  
process to return processed files. If this time elapses with no  
returned files or errors, the job fails. Seconds and minutes values  
cannot both be zero.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Adding or editing a folder-based profile  
A combined total of 10 folder-based profiles and CLI profiles can  
be configured for each external process. For folder-based profiles,  
the input, output, and error locations must reside on the same  
remote machine, or on the same local machine.  
To add or edit a folder-based profile  
Refer to Adding or editing an external process to add an external  
process, and then set up a folder-based profile as follows:  
1. In the Folder Profile Setup dialog, enter or change the name  
for the profile.  
NOTE: Changing a name or a folder affects existing workflows.  
2. To select process input, process output, and error folders, do  
the following:  
NOTE: You will be asked for a user name and password when a  
remote location is selected during setup.  
a. Select [Browse].  
b. In the Browse For Folder dialog, do one of the following:  
Select the desired folder, and then select [OK].  
If you select a remote location, the Remote Connection  
dialog displays. Enter the appropriate User name and  
Password, and select [OK].  
Select [Make New Folder], name the folder, and select  
[OK].  
3. In the timeout drop box, select a duration.  
4. Select [OK]. If you edited an existing profile, a confirmation  
dialog displays. The new profile displays in the Process  
Profiles text box.  
2-176  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
5. To configure additional process profiles, repeat steps 1-4.  
Otherwise, select [OK] to close the External Process Setup  
dialog.  
NOTE 1:You must set up input and output hot folders for the third  
party software that match the input and output folders of the  
profile.  
NOTE 2:For folder-based profiles, the third party software must  
be running to use the external process in a workflow.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Setting up CLI profiles  
The CLI Profile Setup dialog allows you to select a script location  
and enter optional parameters, set up working directory and  
output locations, and define a timeout interval. The dialog includes  
the following options:  
Profile name: Allows you to enter a name for the profile.  
Script full path: Allows you to enter or select the location and file  
name of the script file to be used for the external process.  
Browse…: Opens a common file dialog that allows you to select a  
file.  
Parameters: Allows you to enter optional script parameters.  
Default parameters are $in$ $out$.  
Provide available job data to external process by XML file:  
Allows you to request the system to provide additional information  
to the external process via an XML file written to the external  
process input folder.  
Working directory: Allows you to designate a location on a local  
or remote drive in which the external process node can place input  
files and from which the script can retrieve the files.  
Output location: Optional; allows you to enter the location on a  
local or remote drive in which the script stores successfully  
processed files.  
Timeout: Allows you to enter a duration to wait for the external  
process to return processed files. If this time elapses with no  
returned files or errors, the job fails. Seconds and minutes values  
cannot both be zero.  
See also:  
2-178  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Adding or editing a CLI profile  
A combined total of 10 folder profiles and CLI profiles can be  
configured for each external process. The CLI script full path,  
working directory, and output location (if used) must reside on the  
same remote machine or on the same local machine.  
To add or edit a CLI profile  
Refer to Adding or editing an external process to add an external  
process, and then set up a CLI profile as follows:  
1. In the CLI Profile Setup dialog, enter or change the name for  
the profile.  
NOTE: Changing a name or a folder affects existing  
workflows.  
2. To select a Script full path, select [Browse].  
3. In the Open dialog, locate the script, and select [Open].  
4. (Optional) In the parameters text box, enter additional script  
parameters. For more information on configuring parameters  
NOTE: You may add parameters before, after, or between the  
default parameters, but you should not delete the defaults. If a  
default is deleted, an error message displays when you click  
[OK].  
5. To select a working directory location or an output location, do  
the following:  
NOTE: You will be asked for a user name and password when a  
remote location is selected during setup.  
a. Select [Browse].  
b. In the Browse For Folder dialog, do one of the following:  
Select the desired folder, and then select [OK].  
Select [Make New Folder], name the folder, and select  
[OK].  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
6. In the timeout drop box, select a duration.  
NOTE: If you select a timeout value of zero minutes and zero  
seconds, an error message displays. Select [OK], and then  
enter a valid value.  
7. Select [OK]. If you edited an existing profile, a confirmation  
dialog displays. The new profile displays in the Process  
Profiles text box.  
8. To configure additional process profiles, repeat steps 1-7.  
Otherwise, select [OK] to close the External Process Setup  
dialog.  
See also:  
2-180  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Configuring parameters  
The following examples illustrate various options for configuring  
parameters for CLI profiles.  
Example 1: Using the default parameters  
Scenario: The user would like to execute a script named  
“SomeScript” on the C drive during the execution of the External  
Process node in FreeFlow Process Manager. The script takes an  
input file as its first parameter, does something to the file, and  
stores the result in an output file specified by the second  
parameter.  
The External Process Node for Script is configured in the CLI  
Profile Setup dialog as follows:  
Profile name: Something  
Script Full Path: c:\SomeScript  
Parameters: $in$ $out$  
Working directory: c:\temp (user’s choice)  
Output Location: c:\brianOut (user’s choice)  
Time interval: 30 seconds  
During execution, the user submits the file “someFile”. The  
External Process launches “SomeScript” by launching the  
following command:  
C:\SomeScript c:\temp\someFile c:\brianOut\someFile  
The file “someFile” is copied to the working directory by the  
External Process node prior to launching the script. Also, the  
External Process node automatically uses the same name for the  
input file as for the output file.  
The External process node waits for the script to finish executing  
successfully for the maximum of the time interval (if the time  
interval passes, an error has occurred) and then looks for  
c:\brianOut\someFile.  
If the file is there it is picked up; if not, an error has occurred.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Example 2: Adding a parameter between the input and  
output parameters  
Scenario: Now, assume that the user wants “SomeScript” to use  
an additional parameter, “someParameter,” between the input and  
output parameters. The only difference to the configuration is this:  
Parameters: $in$ someParameter $out$  
During execution, External Process node launches the following  
command:  
C:\SomeScript c:\temp\someFile someParameter  
c:\brianOut\someFile  
Example 3: Adding a parameter after the output  
parameter  
Assume the same scenario as Example 1, except the user wants  
“someParameter” to follow the output parameter. The user would  
configure this way:  
Parameters: $in$ $out$ someParameter  
During the execution, External Process node launches the  
following command:  
C:\SomeScript c:\temp\someFile c:\brianOut\someFile  
someParameter  
Example 4: Adding two parameters  
Scenario: Assume the same scenario as Example 1 except  
“SomeScript” uses two additional parameters “someParameter1”  
and “someParameter2,” and the user wants “someParameter1” to  
come in between input and output parameters, and  
“someParameter2” to come after output Parameter. The  
configuration would be as follows:  
Parameters: $in$ someParameter1 $out$ someParameter2  
During execution, the External Process node launches the  
following command:  
C:\SomeScript c:\temp\someFile someParameter1  
c:\brianOut\someFile someParameter2  
2-182  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Example 5: When the output location is not specified  
Scenario: Assume the same scenario as Example 1, except the  
user does not specify an output location.  
During the execution, External process node launches the  
following command:  
C:\SomeScript c:\temp\someFile c:\temp\someFile  
With no output location specified, the External Process node  
automatically uses the same output parameter as the input  
parameter when the script is launched.  
Example 6: Using “ ” for a path that contains a space  
Scenario: If you are using a path with a space for your DOS  
script, you can use “ “, per this example. Assume the same  
scenario as Example 1, except the working directory is c:\program  
files. Note the space between program and files. The user  
configures the External Process node as follows:  
Profile name: Something  
Script Full Path: c:\SomeScript  
Parameters: “$in$” $out$  
Working directory: c:\program files  
Output Location: c:\brianOut  
Time interval: 30 seconds  
Notice the quotations (“ “) around $in$  
During execution, the External Process node launches the  
following command:  
C:\SomeScript c:\program Files\someFile”  
c:\brianOut\someFile  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Builder  
Example 7: Specifying parameter order  
Scenario: In this scenario, the user submits the file “someFile.”  
The user can specify the parameters in any order in the  
Parameters field.  
Profile name: Something  
Script Full Path: c:\SomeScript  
Parameters: -I $in$ -O $out$  
Working directory: c:\temp (user's choice)  
Output Location: c:\brianOut (user's choice)  
Time interval: 30 seconds (user's choice)  
During execution, the External Process launches SomeScript with  
the following command:  
C:\SomeScript -I c:\temp\someFile -O c:\brianOut\someFile  
Deleting an external process profile  
You can select and remove individual profiles from an external  
process.  
To delete an external process profile  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: External Processes].  
2. In the External Processes dialog, select the process that  
contains the profile you wish to delete, and select [Edit].  
CAUTION: If you select [Delete] in the External Processes  
dialog, you will delete the external process and all profiles  
associated with the process.  
3. In the External Process Setup dialog, select the desired profile  
from the Process Profiles list.  
4. Select [Delete]. The selected profile is deleted. A confirmation  
message displays.  
5. Select [OK].  
See also:  
2-184  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Setting up the SMTP Server  
The Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) Server is used for  
email notification. To support the Notify process step, you must  
designate a mail server for outgoing mail or notifications.  
NOTE: Incoming and outgoing mail cannot be directed without the  
SMTP address of your mail server.  
The SMTP Setup dialog contains the following options:  
SMTP Server text box: Allows you to enter the SMTP Server  
name, for example: smtp.galaxynet.net.  
NOTE: Only valid characters and strings for SMTP Servers are  
accepted. An error message displays if the syntax is incorrect.  
Maximum attachment size: Allows you to set a size limit for e-  
mail attachments in the Notification process. The available range  
is 20 - 1024 MB.  
OK: Closes the dialog and saves the settings.  
Cancel: Closes the dialog and does not save the settings.  
To set up the SMTP server  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: SMTP Setup...].  
2. In the SMTP server text box, enter the name of the mail server  
used for outgoing mail or notifications.  
3. Select a maximum attachment size from 20 - 1024 MB.  
4. Select [OK].  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Setting up the proxy server  
Job submission using JMF/JDF might require communication via  
a proxy server. The Proxy Setup dialog is used to configure an  
address and port number on your proxy server.  
To set up the proxy server  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: Proxy Setup...].  
2. In the Address text box, enter an address for the proxy server.  
3. In the Port text box, enter a port number for the proxy server.  
4. Select [OK].  
2-186  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
Creating preflight profiles  
This is an administrator function.  
The Preflight step validates and checks formatting, and verifies  
the image, fonts, and references to the OPI image server images.  
Preflight profiles are provided via a Callas plug-in using Adobe  
Acrobat Professional.  
To create a preflight profile  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: Preflight Setup...].  
Adobe Acrobat Professional launches.  
2. In Adobe Acrobat Professional, select [Advanced:  
Preflight...].  
3. In the Preflight dialog, select [Edit].  
4. In the Preflight: Edit Profiles dialog, select the [Create a new  
Preflight profile] icon.  
5. Select [New profile].  
6. Enter a profile name and other desired information, and select  
the desired options.  
7. Refer to the “Creating new preflight profiles” procedure in  
Adobe Acrobat Professional to add or create rules and  
conditions, as required.  
8. Exit Adobe Acrobat.  
NOTE: For in-depth information about creating preflight profiles,  
refer to the preflight Help topics in Adobe Acrobat.  
To modify a preflight profile  
NOTE: If a profile has been selected in a Preflight node, and then  
the profile is modified in Adobe Acrobat Professional, the  
modification is not reflected in the already-selected Preflight node.  
In order to use the modified profile, you must create a new  
Preflight node and select the profile again.  
1. In Workflow Builder, select [Options: Preflight Setup...].  
Adobe Acrobat Professional launches.  
2. Select [Advanced: Preflight...].  
3. Select one of the predefined profiles.  
4. Select [Edit].  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
2-187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Builder  
5. Refer to the “Modifying preflight profiles” procedure in Adobe  
Acrobat to add or create rules and conditions, as required.  
6. If desired, to create a duplicate, select [Duplicate].  
7. Exit Adobe Acrobat Professional.  
NOTE: For additional information about creating preflight  
profiles, refer to the preflight Help topics in Adobe Acrobat  
Professional.  
2-188  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Submission Client  
3. Workflow Submission Client  
Xerox FreeFlow Workflow Submission Client allows you to  
perform major job submission tasks, from choosing files to enter in  
a designated workflow to selecting the best workflow for the job.  
About Workflow Submission Client  
Use Workflow Submission Client to:  
Select files for submission from WIndows or from a document  
repository.  
Create a file list (.xfl) to save one or more files for future  
submissions  
Select an automated workflow to which to submit files.  
Launch Workflow Builder.  
Set up Repository credentials.  
If a workflow is set up to accept changes, use Workflow  
Submission Client to:  
Modify the workflow process settings.  
View the job ticket, select an optional job ticket for submission  
with the files, and resolve job ticket conflicts.  
You can also submit files remotely from a workstation or server  
with Remote Workflow Submission Client installed.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Submission Client  
Logging in to Workflow Submission Client  
Process Manager user accounts are created and managed using  
the Windows Local Users and Groups functionality in the  
Computer Management application. During install, Xerox  
FreeFlow Process Manager Administrators and Xerox  
FreeFlowProcess Manager Operators groups are created. Your  
adminstrator then populates these groups with users. Permissions  
to launch applications are based on group membership.  
NOTE: If you are not a member of an authorizing group, contact  
your administrator. If you forget your username and password,  
notify your administrator.  
To log in to the Workflow Submission Client application  
A login screen may or may not display, depending on group  
membership and server location.  
If you enter the incorrect username or password, you receive an  
incorrect username or password error message. You can then  
enter your correct username and password.  
1. Select [Start: Programs: Xerox FreeFlow Software:  
FreeFlow Process Manager: Workflow Submission Client].  
The Login dialog opens for the selected application.  
2. In the User name text box, enter your user name.  
3. In the Password text box, enter your password.  
4. The Domain text box is populated with the domain of the  
currently logged in user, or the last domain entered in the login  
form. Confirm that the proper domain name appears.  
5. Enter the appropriate Process Manager server name in the  
Server text box.  
6. Select [OK]. The main window opens.  
7. If during login to a remote client you enter the incorrect  
username or password, an incorrect username or password  
error message displays. Enter your correct username and  
password.  
3-2  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Submission Client  
Workflow Submission Client main window  
The Workflow Submission Client main window contains four areas  
that represent the main steps in the job submission process: Get  
Files, Select Workflow, Configure Settings, and Submit Job.  
Get Files Area  
Select Workflow Area  
Configure Settings  
Area  
Submit Job Area  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Submission Client  
The Get Files area  
The Get Files area contains a scrollable window that allows you to  
select and manage files from local disks or document repositories.  
The files display in the order in which they are submitted.  
Files are managed with the following buttons:  
Table 3-1. Get Files buttons  
Button Name  
Description  
Add Windows File...  
Displays a Windows browse screen.  
Add Repository File... Displays a repository browse screen.  
Remove  
Removes selected files from the text box.  
Save File List  
Opens a Save common file dialog and allows  
you to save the list of files as a .xfl (Xerox  
File List) file. The file lists can then be  
submitted using the “Add Windows File” and  
“Add Repository File” dialogs.  
Move Up  
Moves a selected file up one position in the  
list.  
Move Down  
Expand/Collapse  
Moves a selected file down one position in  
the list.  
Shows/hides the Select Workflow, Configure  
Settings, and Submit Job areas of the  
window. The Submit Job button is not hidden  
when Collapse is selected.  
The Total status text, under the Get Files text box, lists the number of  
files in the text box.  
3-4  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Submission Client  
The Select Workflow area  
The Select Workflow area displays a scrollable list of the available  
workflows.  
NOTE: A workflow must be enabled in Workflow Builder for it to  
display in the Workflow Submission Client window.  
The list can be sorted by each column by selecting the column  
heading. The following information is displayed for each workflow:  
Table 3-2. Select Workflow columns  
Column  
Name  
Description  
Displays the workflow name.  
Id  
Displays the workflow Id.  
Date Modified  
Processes  
Displays the date the workflow was last changed.  
Displays the workflow process icons.  
Only the icons associated with Pass states are  
shown; Fail states are not shown.  
A workflow is grayed out if it is unavailable due to  
a Join, Convert, or Image Enhance conflict.  
When you sort by this column, the order is  
determined by the number of processes.  
Description  
% Match  
Displays the workflow description.  
Shows the % match: the number of matching  
processes, divided by the number of selected  
processes, multiplied by 100.  
For example, if a user selects 5 check boxes and  
a workflow includes 4 of the processes marked by  
the check boxes, the % Match would be 80%.  
% Match Filter  
Allows you to select check boxes for the  
processes you want to include or exclude in the  
workflow.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Submission Client  
The Configure Settings area  
The Configure Settings area displays the selected workflow. The  
pane displays the workflow processes, including the fail pathways,  
in a view similar to Workflow Builder.  
Settings are configured using the following options:  
Table 3-3. Configure Settings options  
Button Name  
Description  
Edit Settings  
Allows you to access and change process  
settings for the selected process if the  
administrator has configured the settings to allow  
changes.  
Restore Settings Allows you to restore settings to those that  
accompanied the workflow when it was originally  
opened.  
3-6  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Submission Client  
The Submit Job area  
The Submit Job area allows you to configure the job and sender  
names and displays other job details.  
Table 3-4. Submit Job area options  
Component  
Job name  
Description  
Allows you to type a meaningful job name.  
Default: If there is only one file, the file name  
displays here. If there are two or more files,  
the prefix “multi” displays, followed by the first  
filename, until a character limit of 40 is  
reached.  
Use file name as  
job name  
Available when multiple files are selected and  
a workflow without a Join node is selected.  
When selected, the “Job name:” field is  
grayed out and the job names match the  
submitted file names.  
Number of files  
Selected workflow  
Submitter  
Reflects the number of files in the Get Files  
list.  
Contains the name of the workflow selected in  
the Select Workflow area.  
Allows you to type a sender name. The default  
is the current username.  
Submit Job(s)  
Submits the job and displays a confirmation  
message. Label displays as “Jobs” when  
multiple jobs are submitted.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Submission Client  
Workflow Submission Client menus  
The Workflow Submission Client menu bar provides commands  
for selecting files and submitting jobs.  
File menu  
The File menu contains the following options:  
Table 3-5. Workflow Submission Client File menu  
File menu option  
Description  
Add Windows File...  
Opens a Windows browse screen.  
Add Repository File... Opens a repository browse screen.  
Save File List...  
Submit Job  
Opens the Save File List dialog.  
Submits the job. Displays the Submission  
Progress dialog, which shows the  
submission progress in percentage.  
Exit  
Closes the Workflow Submission Client  
application.  
3-8  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Submission Client  
Edit menu  
The Edit menu contains the following options:  
Table 3-6. Workflow Submission Client Edit menu  
Menu  
options  
Description  
Remove  
Removes a selected file from the text box.  
Move Up  
Moves a selected file up one position in the list.  
Moves a selected file down one position in the list.  
Move Down  
Edit  
Settings...  
Opens the Edit Settings dialog for the workflow  
process.  
Restore  
Settings  
Restores settings to those that accompanied the  
workflow when it was originally opened.  
Workflow  
Builder  
Displays the Workflow Builder login dialog if you are  
not logged in; if you are logged in, activates  
Workflow Builder.  
Find...  
Opens the Find dialog, which allows you to locate a  
process node in a workflow.  
View menu  
The View menu contains the following options:  
Table 3-7. Workflow Submission Client View menu  
Menu option  
Description  
File Details  
Shows the details (file name, file size, date  
modified) in the Get Files area.  
File List  
Shows the list (file name only) in the Get Files area.  
Hides % Match and % Match Filter.  
Hide % Match  
Show/Hide  
Process Tool  
Tips  
Show: Allows you to view process settings via tool  
tips in the graphical workflow display by positioning  
the mouse pointer over a workflow process.  
Hide: Disables the tool tips.  
Workflow Icons Small Icons: Displays small icons.  
Medium Icons: Displays mid-sized icons.  
Large Icons: Default; displays large icons.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Submission Client  
Options menu  
The Options menu contains the following option:  
Table 3-8. Workflow Submission Client Option menu  
Menu Option  
Description  
Remove Files After  
Submission  
Removes files from the Get Files list after the  
files are submitted for processing.  
Repository  
Opens a dialog that allows the current user to  
Credentials Setup... enter a Username and Password for the  
active repository.  
Help menu  
The Help menu contains the following options:  
Table 3-9. Workflow Submission Client Help menu  
Menu option  
Description  
Help Topics...  
Displays the Help application to allow you to  
list the Help topics for Workflow Submission  
Client.  
About Workflow  
Displays program and copyright information  
Submission Client... for Workflow Submission Client.  
3-10  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Submission Client  
Job submission  
Job submission involves a few basic steps.  
Job submission process  
Locate and sequence the files: You can select files from  
local disks, DocuShare, or from the document repositories. If  
you are submitting multiple files for joining, list them in the  
desired sequence.  
Select a workflow: Only workflows that have been enabled in  
Workflow Builder display. Ensure the selected workflow  
includes the processes necessary to meet the job criteria.  
Modify the process settings: You can modify process  
settings to meet the needs of a job in the Configure Settings  
area; for example:  
You can change page numbers or watermarks settings via  
the appropriate process settings dialogs.  
You can change the job ticket settings (for example, the  
number of copies, the stock) using the Job Setup dialog in  
Print Settings.  
Name and submit the job: Use the default name or select a  
new name, and then submit the job.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Submission Client  
Workflow selection methods  
NOTE: A workflow must be enabled in Workflow Builder for it to  
display in the Workflow Submission Client window.  
Two basic workflow selection methods are described below.  
Direct method  
Select a workflow if you are familiar with the workflows and the job  
requirements. Keep in mind the following:  
If a workflow does not contain the Convert process, and if you  
have files that require conversion to PDF, the workflow will be  
grayed out.  
When submitting multiple files to a workflow:  
To create a single joined job, Join must be in the workflow.  
To create multiple separate jobs, Join should not be in the  
workflow.  
% Match method  
Select the required components and generate a list of workflows  
that meet the job criteria.  
Check the workflow components that you need to complete a  
given job.  
To sort by processes not included in the workflows, do not  
select the workflow components.  
% Match equals the number of matching processes divided by the  
total number of selected processes, multiplied by 100.  
For example, if you select 5 check boxes, and a workflow includes  
4 of the checked processes and no additional processes, the  
percent match is 80%.  
3-12  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Submission Client  
Submitting a job  
With a single submission, you can process either a single file,  
multiple files as a single joined job, or multiple files as separate  
jobs. The table shows how submission input and the presence of a  
Join node in the workflow defines the job output:  
Table 3-10. File submission with and without join  
Join node in  
Submission  
Single file  
Job(s) created  
Single job  
workflow  
No  
Yes  
No  
Multiple files  
Multiple files  
Single joined job  
Multiple separate jobs  
To submit a job to a workflow  
1. In Workflow Submission Client, select from the following:  
To locate a Windows file(s), select [Add Windows File...],  
and browse for the file.  
NOTE: To retrieve files from DocuShare, select My Network  
Places and navigate to the appropriate Docushare web folder.  
To locate repository files, select [Add Repository File...],  
and browse for the file.  
NOTE: Prior to perfoming operations that require repository  
access, you must set up and save your repository credentials  
in FreeFlow Process Manager. For more information, see  
2. Select [Open] to add the file(s) to the Get Files list.  
3. For jobs that use a workflow with a Join node, the order of the  
list indicates the joined sequence of the files. If necessary, re-  
order the files or file list by selecting an item in the list, and  
then select [Move up] or [Move Down].  
NOTE: To automatically clear files from the Get Files list after  
submission, select [Options: Remove Files after Submission].  
4. (Optional) To save one or more files to a file list (.xfl) for future  
submissions, select [Save File List...]. For more information  
about saving a file list, see the Saving a File List procedure.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Submission Client  
5. Select a workflow directly if you are familiar with the workflows  
and the job requirements, or select the check boxes for the  
workflow components required to complete the job.  
NOTE: To process multiple files as separate jobs, select a  
workflow without a Join step.  
6. To view or modify the process settings for a selected workflow:  
Double-click a workflow process to display the settings  
dialog, or click [Edit Settings]. Modify the settings, and  
select [OK] to save the changes.  
7. Select from the following:  
Type a name in the Job name text box. The default is the  
name of the document, unless multiple files are selected.  
Select [Use file name as job name] to give each job a  
name that matches the submitted file. Each job receives  
the job name specified in Workflow Submission Client with  
an incremental number appended (such as, MyJob 1,  
MyJob2, MyJob3).  
8. If necessary, type a name in the Submitter text box.  
9. Select [Submit Job(s)] to process the files.  
3-14  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Submission Client  
Saving a File List  
The [Save File List] option facilitates the multiple submission of  
files by saving the current list of one or more selected files as a  
Xerox File List (.xfl). Since the files in the file list are really “paths”  
to the source files, any updates to the source files are captured  
when the file list is submitted. File lists are useful for:  
Multiple submissions of the same files to various workflows  
without reselecting the files.  
Rerunning a job in which only one or two of the files in the list  
is updated.  
NOTE: A file list cannot be submitted to a hot folder.  
Consider the following points when creating and using a file list:  
The same file can be included in multiple file lists.  
The same file can be included more than once in the same file  
list.  
The file list exists only in the local Workflow Submission Client.  
If during submission any of the files in the file list no longer  
exist, you are notified, and the missing file(s) are skipped.  
See also:  
To save a file list  
To save one or more files for future submissions, do the following.  
1. In the Workflow Submission Client Get Files area, locate, and  
then select the desired files in the list.  
2. Select [Save File List...]. The Save File List dialog displays.  
3. In the File Name text box, enter a name for the file list.  
4. Select [Browse...]. In the Browse for Folder dialog, select a  
location for saving the File List, and then select [OK]. The  
Location text box is populated with the file location.  
5. Select [OK] to exit the Save File List dialog.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Submission Client  
To submit a file list  
1. In the Workflow Submission Client Get Files area, browse to  
the location of the saved file list.  
2. Select the appropriate file list, identified by an .xfl file  
extension.  
3. Continue with step 2 of the Submitting a job procedure.  
Limitations for Save File List  
Repository files that have been saved in a Xerox File List (.xfl) can  
be successfully loaded only if the Workflow Submission Client  
application has not been closed since the file list was first created.  
Once the Workflow Submission Client application is closed, the  
temporary repository files are removed. If you re-launch the  
application and load the file list, an error message will display for  
each of the removed repository files.  
Submitting Zip files  
Zip files can be submitted only via a hot folder.  
Submitting VI Containers (.vpc)  
VI Container files (.vpc) can be submitted via Workflow  
Submission Client only to workflows containing Review, Print,  
Save, Convert and Impose. Jobs submitted to workflows with  
processes other than these will fail.  
3-16  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Workflow Submission Client  
Submitting a file with saved job ticket information for reprinting  
The [Save the job ticket] option in the Save Settings dialog  
allows you to save the job ticket (XPIF) information with the PDF  
file for reprinting purposes. To reprint via Workflow Submission  
Client, submit only the saved PDF file to the reprint workflow.  
Process Manager automatically picks up the associated job ticket  
and applies it to all print nodes in the workflow.  
For more information about the [Save the job ticket] option, refer  
to the topic “Saving a job ticket with the PDF for reprinting” in the  
Workflow Builder section.  
Submitting QuarkXPress files (.qxd, .qxp)  
QuarkXPress files (.qxd, .qxp) can be submitted via Workflow  
Submission Client only to workflows containing a Convert  
process. QuarkXPress files must be manually converted to PDFs  
before they can be processed in a workflow. To do this, you must:  
Set up a QuarkXPress working directory in the Convert  
Settings. Files are held in the directory until they are manually  
converted.  
Set up an e-mail notification address in the Convert Settings.  
This allows you to send an e-mail message to indicate that a  
QuarkXPress document is waiting to be converted to PDF. A  
message are sent for each QuarkXPress document  
processed.  
For more information see, “Configuring Convert settings” in  
Workflow Builder.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Submission Client  
About submitting RDOs  
The FreeFlow document type, RDO, stands for Raster Document  
Object. It is an electronic document that is made up of images. An  
RDO can contain several different types of images: TIFF, JPEG,  
and Adobe PDF. Images can be black and white, grayscale, or  
color.  
Identifying the parts of an RDO  
An RDO is a compound object (an object having many parts), but  
FreeFlow sees an RDO as a single document. The two main parts  
of an RDO are the RDO file and the .CON directory. The RDO part  
of the file contains all the information about how to organize the  
images in the document to produce the desired output, or  
appearance. The .CON directory part of the file contains all the  
images of the document. Each TIFF, JPEG, Adobe PDF, and file  
is stored as an individual file in the .CON directory.  
When you open Windows Explorer and look for your documents,  
you see both parts of the RDO. For a document named Family,  
you see a file named Family.rdo and a directory named  
Family.con. In File Manager, you can view only the RDO.  
FreeFlow treats the parts of the RDO as a single document.  
3-18  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Submission Client  
Submitting RDOs  
RDOs are submitted to a workflow via Workflow Submission  
Client, the same way that you submit any job to a workflow:  
1. Locate the file on a local disk or document repository.  
2. Select a workflow.  
3. Submit the job.  
To submit an RDO and produce a PDF  
To submit an RDO and produce a PDF, the RDO must be  
submitted to a workflow in which Convert is the first step.  
To submit an RDO and produce an RDO (RDO reprint)  
RDOs previously set up with the necessary job parameters in  
Makeready can be submitted to Process Manager for reprinting.  
Minor changes can be made to the job ticket—for example, the  
copy count.  
You can submit an RDO reprint to a workflow that contains any  
combination of Save, Print, and Review. Review is available only  
to pause, approve, fail, change copy counts, and print a proof. You  
will not be able to view the RDO using [View Document]; the  
RDO ticket can be viewed via [Settings]. This is possible only if  
you have a Print node.  
NOTE 1:The RDO embedded job ticket is used to print the job  
unless “Always use these settings” is selected in the Print node  
settings.  
NOTE 2:If “Always use these settings” is selected, the Print node  
settings are used and the RDO embedded job ticket is ignored.  
RDO limitations  
Successful submission of linked RDOs (an RDO containing a link  
to another RDO) and set labeling RDOs via Workflow Submission  
Client or hot folders cannot be assured.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Workflow Submission Client  
Remote Workflow Submission Client  
Process Manager can support multiple remote instances of  
Workflow Submission Client. This allows you to submit files by  
logging in to any workstation or server in your print shop that has  
the Remote Workflow Submission Client software installed. The  
following file types are supported:  
If only Adobe Reader is installed on the client system, only  
PDF file types can be submitted remotely via the Add  
Windows File, Add Repository File, or Add Cabinet File (for  
legacy Document Library) options. This also applies if Adobe  
Reader is not installed.  
If Adobe Acrobat is installed on the client system, then all  
supported file types can be submitted.  
Process Manager supports a maximum of 8 instances of Remote  
Workflow Submission Client, not including the client on the  
FreeFlow Process Manager server.  
NOTE: Ensure that the Process Manager server is selected in the  
text box of the remote client login screen.  
Accessing Workflow Builder from Workflow Submission Client  
During the job submission process, you may need to create new  
workflows in Workflow Builder if none exist that meet the needs of  
the job.  
To access Workflow Builder from Workflow Submission Client:  
1. In Workflow Submission Client, select [Edit: Workflow  
Builder].  
2. The Workflow Builder login dialog may or may not display,  
depending on group membership. See Logging in to Workflow  
Submission Client. If required, log in to Workflow Builder.  
3. Select [File: New].  
4. Create a new workflow.  
5. Save the workflow.  
6. Enable the workflow.  
7. Exit Workflow Builder.  
3-20  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Job Manager  
4. Workflow Job Manager  
Xerox FreeFlow Workflow Job Manager allows you to view and  
manage active and completed jobs in the system.  
About Workflow Job Manager  
Use Workflow Job Manager to perform tasks at the job level:  
View job details and status.  
Review and edit jobs in Adobe Acrobat.  
Edit process settings.  
Print hardcopy proofs.  
Identify faulted jobs.  
Resubmit jobs.  
Approve, fail, pause, or delete jobs.  
Generate, view, and export reports.  
Set up repository credentials.  
Launch Workflow Submission Client, Workflow Builder, Printer  
Registration, and FreeFlow Administration Tool.  
Review and configure incoming third-party jobs from  
Management Information Systems (MIS).  
Perform selected tasks remotely from a workstation or server  
with Remote Workflow Job Manager Client installed.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Job Manager  
Logging into Workflow Job Manager  
Process Manager user accounts are created and managed using  
the Windows Local Users and Groups functionality in the  
Computer Management application. During install, Xerox  
FreeFlow Process Manager Administrators and Xerox  
FreeFlowProcess Manager Operators groups are created. Your  
adminstrator then populates these groups with users. Permissions  
to launch applications are based on group membership.  
NOTE: If you are not a member of an authorizing group, contact  
your administrator. If you forget your username and password,  
notify your administrator.  
To log in to the Workflow Job Manager application  
A login screen may or may not display, depending on group  
membership and server location.  
If you enter the incorrect username or password, you receive an  
incorrect username or password error message. You can then  
enter your correct username and password.  
1. Select [Start: Programs: Xerox FreeFlow Software:  
FreeFlow Process Manager: Workflow Job Manager] from  
the Windows desktop.The Login dialog opens.  
2. In the User name text box, enter your user name.  
3. In the Password text box, enter your password.  
4. The Domain text box is populated with the domain of the  
currently logged in user, or the last domain entered in the login  
form. Confirm that the proper domain name appears.  
5. Enter the appropriate Process Manager server name in the  
Server text box.  
6. Select [OK]. The main window opens.  
7. If during login to a remote client you enter the incorrect  
username or password, an incorrect username or password  
error message displays. Enter your correct username and  
password.  
4-2  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Job Manager  
The Workflow Job Manager main window  
The Workflow Job Manager window provides an overview of all  
jobs and their current status in the system. You can view all jobs in  
the system, including active and completed jobs.  
Two major areas comprise the Workflow Job Manager main  
window: the Status area and the Jobs area.  
Status  
Area  
Jobs  
Area  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
The Status area  
The upper portion of the Workflow Job Manager window displays  
the detailed status of a job selected in the Jobs area.  
The status area reflects the status of the selected job and the  
selected workflow node. The buttons that display vary, based on  
the selected workflow and node. The status area displays the  
name of the job and includes the following elements:  
Process status text: Displays the name and status of a  
selected workflow process—for example, “Passed in Convert.”  
Includes an instructive statement—for example, “You may edit  
settings and resubmit to this node.”  
Selected process arrow: An arrow connects the currently  
selected process to the status area.  
Process buttons: The available buttons display for the  
selected process—for example View Document and  
Approve.  
Progress bar: Indicates the status of an in-progress  
automated process.  
NOTE: When submitting multiple files for conversion, the progress  
bar shows the conversion progress on a per file basis. For each  
file, the progress bar moves to 50% to indicate that the file is  
processing, and then to 100% when processing is complete.  
4-4  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
Workflow: Graphically represents the workflow of the selected  
job.  
Active process: A green highlight indicates the currently  
active process; green arrows link the processes.  
Completed process: A blue check mark indicates a  
completed process.  
Selected process: A blue background indicates a  
selected process; an arrow connects the selected node to  
the message area. Selecting a process displays the  
Settings button, if available, and allows you to access the  
settings dialog.  
Process Settings: You can position the mouse cursor  
over a process to view the setting in a tool tip.  
Input settings: In Workflow Job Manager, you can open  
the Input settings dialog and view a list of the original input  
files for the selected job. Input files can also be viewed via  
the tool tip.  
NOTE: The workflow process steps cannot be dragged and  
dropped in this graphical view.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Job Manager  
The Jobs area  
The lower portion of the Workflow Job Manager window lists all  
jobs, active and completed, currently in the system.  
Each row lists a job and the job details.  
The toolbar allows you to launch Workflow Submission Client,  
or delete a job, or launch Workflow Builder.  
4-6  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
The Jobs area columns  
Each row in the Workflow Job Manager Jobs area contains the  
following information about a job:  
Table 4-1. Jobs area columns  
Column  
Description  
Name  
Id  
Lists the names of the current jobs.  
Displays the Job Id number.  
Status  
Print Status  
Lists the current status of each job.  
Shows the status of print jobs submitted through  
Process Manager. Available for IPP printers only.  
Workflow  
Lists the names of the workflow used.  
Lists the system-generated workflow Id.  
Lists the time and date the job was submitted.  
Workflow Id  
Date Submitted  
Submitter  
Lists the job submitter’s user name from login. For  
hot folders, defaults to the administrator.  
Dynamic  
Indicates (Yes, No) whether the workflow is  
dynamic.  
Processes  
Displays a small graphical representation of the  
workflows.  
Additional features allow you to:  
Sort the jobs list by the items in any column by selecting the  
column heading. For example, to sort the table alphabetically  
by workflow, select the Workflow column heading.  
View a context menu for a listed job by right-clicking the job.  
Make multiple selections from the list using <Control + Shift>.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
Print Status descriptions  
The following sample print statuses might be displayed in  
Workflow Job Manager area Print Status column. For a complete  
list, consult your printer documentation.  
Table 4-2. Print Status descriptions  
Status  
Description  
Active  
Pending  
The job is in process or in a printing state.  
The job is ready and is waiting to be processed at the system.  
The job is paused because of a printer or job execution problem.  
The job is printing.  
Paused  
Printing  
Processing  
Rejected  
The job is being processed.  
The job was rejected by the system while it was being received.  
Save completed  
Waiting for printer  
Waiting for save  
The job was saved successfully.  
The job has completed processing and is waiting for the printer.  
The job has completed processing and is being saved  
4-8  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
Workflow Job Manager menus  
The Workflow Job Manager menu bar provides commands for  
managing jobs.  
Commands can also be accessed by right-clicking a job to display  
the context menu. Menu items that are not available are grayed  
out.  
See also:  
The File menu  
The File menu contains the following options:  
Table 4-3. Workflow Job Manager File menu  
File Menu Option  
Description  
Exit  
Closes the Workflow Job Manager application.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Job Manager  
The Edit menu  
The Edit menu contains the following options:  
Table 4-4. Workflow Job Manager Edit menu.  
Edit Menu  
Option  
Description  
Settings...  
Displays the settings dialog for the selected  
process.  
View  
Document  
Allows you to preview the current state of the  
document in the Review step or in prior steps and to  
interactively edit the document in Adobe Acrobat.  
In remote Workflow Job Manager, if Adobe Reader  
is installed, you can view, but not edit, PDF files. If  
Adobe Acrobat is installed, you can view and edit  
PDF files.  
Preflight  
Results  
Opens Adobe Acrobat with any PDF files generated  
from preflight processes completed for that job.  
Print Results  
Opens the Print Results dialog for each instance of  
a production print process in the workflow that has  
completed submission of the document to the  
printer. Print status is available only from IPP  
printers.  
Pause  
Pauses the job and allows a user to review.  
Available if a job is processing and not failed.  
Resume  
Approve/  
Fail  
Allows the workflow to continue to the next steps.  
Available if a job is paused.  
Allows a job to continue in the workflow. Changes to  
Resume. Available if a job is at a review step.  
The job goes to the failed status. Available if a job is  
at a review step or is paused. Changes to Delete.  
Resubmit  
Resumes the workflow at the currently selected  
process; uses the changed process settings.  
Appears in place of Approve and Fail buttons when  
a process step is selected while the workflow is at a  
Review step.  
Delete  
Find...  
Deletes the job.  
Opens the Find dialog, which allows you to locate a  
process node in a workflow.  
4-10  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
The View menu  
The View menu contains the following options:  
Table 4-5. Workflow Job Manager View menu  
View Menu  
Option  
Description  
Show/Hide  
Process Tool  
Tips  
Show: Allows you to view process settings via  
tool tips in the graphical workflow display by  
positioning the mouse pointer over a workflow  
process.  
Hide: Disables the tool tips.  
Workflow Icons  
Small Icons: Displays small icons.  
Medium Icons: Displays mid-sized icons.  
Large Icons: Default; displays large icons.  
The Options menu  
The Options menu contains the following options:  
Table 4-6. Workflow Job Manager Options menu  
Options Menu  
Description  
Option  
Reports...  
Opens the reports dialog, in which you can select,  
define, view, and export reports.  
Repository  
Credentials  
Setup...  
Opens a dialog that allows the current user to  
enter a Username and Password for the active  
repository.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
The Launch Menu  
The Launch menu contains the following options:  
Table 4-7. Workflow Job Manager Launch menu  
Launch Menu  
Option  
Description  
Workflow Builder  
Launches Workflow Builder.  
Workflow  
Launches Workflow Submission Client.  
Submission Client  
Printer Registration Launches Printer Registration.  
FreeFlow  
Launches FreeFlow Administration Tool.  
Administration Tool  
The Help menu  
The Help menu contains the following options:  
Table 4-8. Workflow Job Manager Help menu  
Help Menu  
Description  
Option  
Help Topics...  
Displays the Help application to allow you to list  
the Help topics for Workflow Job Manager.  
About Workflow  
Job Manager...  
Displays program and copyright information for  
Workflow Job Manager.  
4-12  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
Workflow Job Manager toolbar  
The Workflow Job Manager toolbar provides commands for  
managing jobs.  
The Jobs toolbar  
The Jobs toolbar includes the following options:  
Table 4-9. Jobs toolbar  
Workflow  
Submission  
Client  
Launches Workflow Submission Client; available if  
there is at least one enabled workflow on the system.  
Delete  
Deletes the selected job with all intermediate files.  
Saved workflows are not deleted.  
Workflow Builder  
Launches Workflow Builder  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Job Manager  
Managing Jobs  
This section contains the activities available within Workflow Job  
Manager, including checking job, process, and workflow status;  
editing documents; editing workflow settings for specific jobs;  
approving or deleting jobs; viewing print results; or opening  
Workflow Submission Client to start a new job.  
Checking the status of a job  
When you choose to view the details of individual jobs, details are  
displayed in the status area at the top of the screen and include:  
Graphical display: Depicts the workflow process steps. A “+”  
in the workflow indicates a process branch that was created  
due to a failed process. Click “+” to open the branch; click “-” to  
close the branch.  
Progress bar: Shows the progress of the current process.  
To check the status of a specific job  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a job from the Jobs list. The  
progress bar and workflow display in the status area.  
2. Review the information in the status area.  
3. Repeat step 1 to view the details of another job.  
4-14  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Workflow Job Manager  
Creating reports  
The reports feature allows you to set up, generate, view and  
export various customized reports. The reports can include audit  
trail data, such as status and information about each job  
processed; as well as accounting data, such as processing time  
and number of impressions. You can also manage accounting  
data for past deleted jobs.  
Reports can be viewed in Workflow Job Manager, or can be  
exported to the following formats:  
CSV comma delimited (*.csv)  
XML (*.xml)  
The report function is also available via Remote Workflow Job  
Manager Client.  
You can set up and generate the following reports:  
Table 4-10. Report categories and types  
Report Category  
Report Type  
Job reports  
Full job report  
Job totals daily  
Job totals monthly  
Job totals yearly  
Workflow reports  
Process reports  
Full workflow report  
Single workflow daily  
Single workflow monthly  
Single workflow yearly  
All workflows daily  
All workflows monthly  
All workflows yearly  
Single job  
All jobs  
Process results daily  
Process results monthly  
Process results yearly  
Print results  
Print results report  
System counters  
Counters daily  
Counters monthly  
Counters yearly  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
The Reports dialog allows you to select a report type and define  
the report parameters. It provides access to dialogs that allow you  
to view or export a report, and purge data for past jobs. Dialog  
options, which vary depending on the selected report, include:  
Workflow name: Allows you to enter the workflow name.  
Workflow Id: Allows you to enter the workflow Id.  
Job name: Displays for reports that require an exact job name;  
allows you to enter the job name.  
Job Id: Allows you to enter the job Id.  
Category: Allows you to select a report category. Report options  
for the category are displayed in the Report type field.  
Type: Options depend on the report category selection.  
Start date: Allows you to a select a start date for inclusion of data  
in a report.  
End date: Allows you to a select an end date for inclusion of data  
in a report.  
All dates: Allows you select the use of all available data in terms  
of dates for report generation  
Attributes to include: Includes the appropriate data/column  
options for the selected report type.  
NOTE 1:Processing time is displayed in seconds.  
NOTE 2:“Impressions” refers to the number of sides of paper  
printed. Data is available only at the time of print. If an IPP  
connection is not available at the time the report is requested, the  
number of impressions is not reported.  
Move Up: Allows you to shift the selected data fields up in the list;  
moves the data column to the left in the report.  
Move down: Allows you to shift the selected data fields in the list;  
moves the data column to the left in the report.  
Select all: When selected, places a check beside all of the  
attributes listed. Automatically clears if you deselect any attribute.  
Sort attribute: Available if at least one report attribute is selected.  
Allows you to sort a report by the selected attribute in ascending  
or descending order.  
4-16  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Job Manager  
Purge: Opens the Purge dialog, which allows you to remove  
accounting data for deleted jobs.  
View: Generates a report and displays a report for viewing.  
Export...: Opens the Export dialog.  
Close: Closes the Reports dialog.  
To create a report  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select [Options: Reports...] to  
display the Reports dialog.  
2. Select the report category and type.  
3. If required, enter a Workflow name and/or Workflow Id, Job  
name and/or Job Id in the appropriate text fields. The  
displayed fields vary depending on the selected report type.  
NOTE: You can also enter a wildcard for the workflow or job  
name, for example, *reprint.  
4. Select a Start date from the drop box.  
Type the day or year; or  
Highlight the month, day, or year, and use the up/down  
arrows to select the desired option.  
5. Select an End date from the drop box.  
NOTE: Only data for jobs occurring in the date range will be  
included.  
6. In the Attributes to include window, scroll as needed, and  
select the individual attributes or select Select all to include all  
attributes. Attributes vary, based on the job type.  
7. To define the position of the data in the report columns:  
a. Select the attribute, and select Move Up to move the data  
column to the left in the report.  
b. Select the attribute, and select Move Down to move the  
data column to the right in the report.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Job Manager  
8. To generate the report sorted by a specific column, in the Sort  
attribute window:  
a. Select an attribute.  
b. Select the desired data display sequence: Ascending to  
display from lowest to highest; Descending to display from  
highest to lowest.  
9. Continue selecting report options, or select [Close] to close  
the dialog.  
See also:  
4-18  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Job Manager  
Viewing a report  
Once you set up the report parameters in the Reports dialog, you  
can select [View] to generate the configured report and view the  
report data. Report features include:  
The report name in the window title.  
A column for each report attribute selected in the Reports  
dialog. Columns can be repositioned by dragging and  
dropping.  
To view a report  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select [Options: Reports...] to  
display the Reports dialog. Set up the desired report.  
2. Select [View] to generate and display the report.  
3. (Optional) If you need to modify the report setup, click the  
Reports dialog to bring it to the foreground, make the  
necessary changes, and then select [View] to generate and  
view the modified report.  
4. To view multiple reports side-by-side, leave the current report  
open, click the Reports dialog to bring it to the foreground,  
make new report selections, and then select [View]. Repeat as  
needed.  
NOTE: To print, save, or archive the report, it must be exported.  
5. Close the report(s).  
6. Select [Close] to exit the Reports dialog  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
Exporting a report  
Once you set up the parameters in the Reports dialog, you can  
export the report data.  
NOTE: You can load report data into an application such as  
Microsoft Excel, and then produce customized reports by  
combining reports.  
Select [Export] to display the Export dialog, which includes the  
following options:  
File name: Allows you to enter the file name for the export file.  
Location: Displays the directory selected by using the Browse  
common dialog that will receive the exported report.  
Browse: Opens a Browse for Folder dialog. Allows you to select a  
file location.  
Format: Allows you to select the file type to export the report.  
Encoding: Available for CSV format only. Allows you to select the  
encoding type.  
OK: Closes the window and exports the report.  
Cancel: Discards changes and closes window.  
To export a report  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select [Options: Reports...] to  
display the Reports dialog. Set up the desired report. You may  
want to view the report before exporting it.  
2. Select [Export] to display the Export dialog.  
3. In the file name text field, enter a name for the export file.  
4. To select a file location, select [Browse].  
5. In the Browse For Folder dialog, do one of the following:  
Select the desired folder, and select [OK]; or  
Select [Make New Folder], name the folder, and select  
[OK].  
4-20  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
6. In the Format drop box, select the desired format. Options  
include:  
CSV comma delimited (*.csv), for database support such  
as Microsoft Access and Microsoft Excel.  
XML (*.xml), a current method for data exchange used, for  
example, by database management systems and for VIPP  
printing.  
7. In the Encoding drop box, select the encoding type for  
exporting the report. Options include:  
Unicode (UTF-8), which can be used internationally to  
support Arabic, Hebrew, and other languages.  
ANSI, which is compatible with older systems.  
8. Select [OK] to close the window and export the report.  
NOTE: The CSV file might display using the icon of an associated  
spreadsheet program.  
See also:  
Purging report data  
To help manage the database size, accounting data from deleted  
jobs can be removed from the database.  
NOTE: Deleting jobs from the Workflow Job Manager window  
should not be confused with the Purge function.  
Select [Purge] in the Reports dialog to display the Purge dialog,  
which includes the following options:  
Never: Never removes accounting data.  
Now: Removes data for deleted jobs upon clicking [OK].  
Older than: Purges the records older than the specified value. If  
selected, the default is 365 days.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
OK: Performs one of the following, and then closes the dialog:  
If Now is selected: Purges the accounting data for deleted  
jobs.  
If Older than n days is selected and unchanged: Continues on  
the fixed rate, checking and purging the accounting data for  
deleted jobs on a daily basis.  
If the number of days is changed: Restarts the duration count  
before purging.  
Cancel: Closes the dialog and disregards any changes made in  
the dialog.  
To purge report data  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select [Options: Reports...] to  
display the Reports dialog.  
2. Select a report.  
3. Select [Purge].  
4. Select one of the following:  
Never: To never remove accounting data.  
Now: To remove data when you select [OK].  
Older than [n] day(s): To daily purge records older than the  
value specified in the days spinner box.  
5. Select [OK] to process your selection and close the dialog.  
See also:  
4-22  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Job Manager  
Viewing and editing a document in Adobe Acrobat  
The View Document function is available whenever a PDF job is at  
a Review step or is paused.  
It allows you to open the PDF file in Adobe Acrobat, preview its  
current state and, if necessary, edit the document.  
NOTE: You cannot change the file submission or the selected  
workflow, but you can access the other settings if you are allowed  
to change settings.  
The following options are available:  
Approve/Resume: When selected, the job continues in the  
workflow.  
Fail: When selected, the job fails.  
To view and edit a job in Adobe Acrobat  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a job that displays Attention  
Required for Review, or that lists a status of Paused or Review  
in the Jobs list.  
2. Select from the following:  
At the Review or paused step, select [View Document].  
Adobe Acrobat displays the PDF document.  
Select a step that precedes the Review step. Select [View  
Document] to open Adobe Acrobat and display a PDF  
document for the step.  
NOTE 1:If a document from an earlier step is edited, the changes  
do not affect the later document unless the job is resubmitted  
before the place where the document was edited.  
NOTE 2:Optional selection methods: You can also right-click a  
step and select [View Document] from the context menu, or  
select a step and select [Edit: View Document].  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
3. If necessary, modify the document using the Adobe Acrobat  
features.  
4. If necessary, save the document.  
5. Exit Adobe Acrobat.  
Viewing preflight results  
A Preflight process step must be completed for a job in order to  
select this option.  
To view preflight results  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a job from the Jobs list.  
2. Select a Preflight node, and then select from the following:  
Right click the node and select [Preflight Results] from  
the context menu.  
Select [Edit: Preflight Results].  
Select the [Preflight Results] button.  
3. Adobe Acrobat displays the results for the selected Preflight  
node.  
4. Exit Adobe Acrobat.  
4-24  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
Viewing print results  
Use the Print Results dialog to obtain information about  
documents submitted to IPP printers. The dialog updates  
periodically to display up-to-date information about each instance  
of a production print process in a workflow, including printer name,  
queue name, job name, job status, job ID, time, print quantity,  
finishing type, collation, and output.  
To view print results  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a job from the Jobs list.  
2. Select a Print step, then select from the following:  
Right-click the node, and select [Print Results] from the  
context menu.  
Select [Edit: Print Results].  
Select a Print step, and then select the [Print Results]  
button.  
3. Review the print results for the selected Print node.  
4. Exit the Print Results dialog.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
Modifying workflow settings  
Settings...: Available if a job is at a Review step or paused and a  
configurable process step is selected in the workflow. It provides  
access to the workflow process settings.  
Resubmit: Available if a job is paused at a Review step and a  
previous process step is selected. When selected, it reprocesses  
the workflow at the step that is currently selected.  
NOTE 1:During the resubmit operation, if there is interaction with  
a repository, the RMS credentials of the current user (the user  
running Workflow Job Manager) are used. If the current user of  
Workflow Job Manager does not have proper RMS credentials  
saved, the job will fail during resubmit.  
NOTE 2:If a job is in a Review state prior to the installation of the  
Unlimited User Conversion, when you resubmit the job after the  
Unlimited User Conversion is installed, the files remain at low  
resolution.  
To modify workflow settings  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a job that is at a Review step  
or is paused.  
2. Select a workflow process step.  
3. Select [Settings]. If the process is not configurable, [Settings]  
is grayed out.  
4. Make the desired changes.  
5. Select [OK].  
4-26  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
Pausing a job  
You can pause a job if it is processing and not in a failed status.  
The following options are available for a paused job:  
View document: Opens the PDF file in Adobe Acrobat; allows  
you to review and edit the document.  
Settings...: Available if a job is at a Review step or paused and a  
configurable process step is selected in the workflow. It provides  
access to the workflow process settings.  
Resume: When selected, the job continues in the workflow.  
Fail: When selected, the job fails.  
To pause a job  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a job from the Jobs list. The  
job must be processing.  
2. Select [Pause].  
NOTE: The job pauses after the current process is done  
processing.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
Approving a job at a Review step  
A job can be approved if it is at a Review step.  
The following options are available for a job awaiting approval:  
View document: Opens the PDF file in Adobe Acrobat; allows  
you to review and edit the document.  
Settings...: Available during the Review process step. Provides  
access to the workflow process settings.  
Copies: Available when a selected job is at the Review step. If the  
job’s workflow contains a Print step after the Review step, it opens  
the Copies dialog.  
Print Proof: Available when a selected job is at a Review step,  
only if the workflow contains a Print step following the Review  
step. Allows you to print a high resolution proof of the PDF file  
processed to that point, on the next available Print step in the  
workflow.  
Approve: Available during the Review process step. When  
selected, the job continues in the workflow.  
Fail: When selected, the job fails.  
See also:  
To approve a job at a Review step  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a job that displays Attention  
Required for Review, or that lists a status of Paused or Review  
in the Jobs list.  
2. Select [Approve].  
4-28  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
Failing a job  
You can fail a job if it is paused or at a Review step. The following  
option is available for a failed job:  
Delete: Deletes the job and all intermediate files. The workflow is  
not deleted.  
To fail a job  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a job that displays Attention  
Required for Review, or that lists a status of Paused or Review  
in the Jobs list.  
2. Select [Fail].  
3. The status of the job becomes Failed.  
Deleting a job  
This process deletes the job and all intermediate files. The  
workflow is not deleted.  
To delete a job  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a job from the Jobs list.  
2. In the Jobs toolbar, select [Delete].  
3. Select [Yes] to confirm.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Job Manager  
Modifying the copy count  
The [Copies...] option is available when a selected job is at the  
Review step. If the job’s workflow contains a Print step after the  
Review step, it opens the Copies dialog, in which the following  
options are available:  
Quantity (original document): Allows you to change the  
number of copies to print, from 1-9999999, for all Print steps  
that follow the Review step in the workflow branch.  
Represents the quantity of the document as submitted via an  
XPIF, JDF or manifest value (order jacket file field for  
Quantity). If the copy count dialog is opened from a Review  
node prior to the copy count being modified by a multi-up  
repeated Imposition node, only this option displays.  
Quantity (imposed document): Allows you to modify the  
imposed copy count. If the Copy Count dialog is opened from  
a Review node after the copy count is modified by a multi-up  
repeated Imposition node, this option is available and the  
Quantity (original document) cannot be modified. Quantity  
(imposed document) is available when you:  
Process the job through a Xerox imposition node (not  
PREPS) that is multi-up repeated.  
Enable the Copy Count Divisor feature via [Workflow  
Builder: Processes: right-click Impose: Settings...].  
This feature enables the system to adjust the copy count to  
maintain the original quantity intent for workflows that  
contain multiple-up impositions.  
Submit a job with a job ticket quantity intent.  
Use Print nodes that do not have “Always use these  
settings” selected.  
OK: Sets the copy counts of Print steps following the current  
Review step to the specified number.  
During the Review task, if both Quantity (original document)  
and Quantity (imposed document) are available for a Print  
node, the value displayed in the Print node Quantity setting is the  
Quantiy (imposed document) value.  
For more information about the copy count divisor, see the topic  
To enable the copy count divisor.”  
4-30  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
To modify the copy count  
NOTE: The job must have a Print step following a Review step.  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a job from the Jobs list. The  
job must be at a Review step.  
2. Select [Copies...].  
3. In the [Quantity (original document) section, set the number  
of copies to print.  
4. In the [Quantity (imposed document) section, set the  
quantity of the imposed document to print. See description,  
above, for a list of availability criteria.  
5. Select [OK].  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Job Manager  
Printing a hardcopy proof  
A hard proof allows you to review a hardcopy of the job before  
printing a full production run.  
The [Print Proof] option is available when a selected job is at a  
Review step. It uses the job ticket settings, with a copy count of  
one, to print a high resolution proof of the PDF file processed up to  
that point on the next available Print step in the workflow.  
NOTE: [Print Proof] is only available if the workflow contains a  
Print step following the Review step.  
Printer status and results for print proof jobs are not available in  
the Process Manager reports. However, you can obtain the job  
information in the production printer Job Manager.  
To print a hardcopy proof  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a job from the Jobs list. The  
job must be stopped at the Review step.  
2. Select [Print Proof] to print a single copy. Obtain and review  
the proof.  
NOTE: A “Proof sent to printer” message displays when the  
“Print Proof” button is selected and the document is  
successfully sent to the printer.  
A “Proof failed to print” message displays when you select  
[Print Proof] and the document is sent to the printer but fails  
to print.  
3. If appropriate, select [Approve] to print the entire job.  
4-32  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
Adding a recipient to a Notify step with no recipient address specified  
If the [Enter recipient address during job processing] option is  
selected during configuration of the Notification Settings, the job l  
runs until it reaches the Notify step. It then pauses and displays  
the following message:  
“Attention Required for Notify. Please add recipients to the notify  
settings and resume the job.”  
The following options are available for the job when you select a  
Notify step with no recipient addresses specified:  
View Document: Opens the PDF file in Adobe Acrobat; allows  
you to review and edit the document.  
Settings: Opens the Notification Settings dialog and allows you to  
enter recipient addresses.  
Resume: Continues processing the job. Is grayed out if no  
recipients are specified, and the submitter did not check the “Allow  
job to continue even if no notification is sent” check box.  
Fail: Fails the job.  
To add a recipient to a Notify step with no recipient address  
specified  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a job from the Jobs list with  
Incomplete Settings in the Status column.  
NOTE: The job must have a Notify step following a Review step.  
2. Select [Settings].  
3. Select from the following in the Notification settings dialog:  
Enter the recipient email address.  
Select [Allow job to continue even if no notification is  
sent] to prevent the job from failing if email notification is  
not sent due to the lack of a recipient address or other  
failure.  
4. Select [OK].  
5. Select [Resume].  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
Viewing Web Services Job Instructions  
Web Services job instructions can be viewed via a URL link by  
selecting [View Job Instructions]. This option is available when a  
selected Web Services job is in a Review, paused, or Incomplete  
Notify Settings state.  
To view Web Services job instructions  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select a Web Services job from the  
Jobs list.  
2. Select [View Job Instructions]. The system default web  
browser opens to the WebServices-supplied URL for the  
selected job.  
4-34  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
Remote Workflow Job Manager Client  
Process Manager can support multiple remote instances of  
Workflow Job Manager. This allows you to manage jobs by  
logging in to any workstation or server in your print shop that has  
the Remote Workflow Job Manager Client software installed.  
Process Manager supports a maximum of 8 instances of Remote  
Workflow Job Manager Client, not including the client on the  
FreeFlow Process Manager server.  
NOTE: Ensure that the Process Manager server is selected in the  
text box of the remote client login screen.  
Using the View Document function  
To use the View Document function when a job is stopped at the  
Review task, Adobe Acrobat or Abobe Reader must be installed.  
Otherwise, the function is disabled.  
If Adobe Reader is installed:  
You can use the View Document function to view PDF files.  
You cannot edit PDF files.  
If Adobe Acrobat is installed, you can use the View Document  
function to:  
View PDF files  
Edit PDF files  
Functions not available in Remote Workflow Job Manager  
Client  
The following administrative functions are not available or are  
disabled in Remote Workflow Job Manager Client:  
Preflight setup  
SMTP setup  
Proxy setup  
Hot folder setup  
External process setup  
Process status modifications  
Printer polling interval  
The launch of Workflow Builder from Job Manager  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
Job In Use dialog  
When using Remote Workflow Job Manager Client, only one  
remote client at a time can modify a job. If another user attempts  
to edit or review documents associated with a job that is being  
edited or reviewed, the system locks the job and the Job in Use  
Dialog displays. This prevents other clients from accessing the  
job. Dialog options include:  
Unlock: Available only on the server installation of Workflow Job  
Manager. Brings up the Unlock Confirmation dialog.  
Cancel: Returns the user to Workflow Job Manager; does not  
open the job or the PDF associated with the job.  
OK: Appears only on the remote version of Job Manager. The  
remote user cannot access or unlock the job. The user must wait  
for the other user to finish or for the administrator to override the  
lock from the local server.  
Unlock Confirmation dialog  
The Unlock Confirmation dialog displays when a user selects  
[Unlock] in the Job in Use dialog. Dialog options include:  
Yes: Closes the dialog. The file is unlocked, potentially nullifying  
any changes made by the user who originally had the file or job  
open. The selected file or job opens.  
No: Closes the dialog and the Job In Use dialog.  
4-36  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Workflow Job Manager  
Accessing Workflow Builder from Workflow Job Manager  
You might need to access Workflow Builder to create or modify a  
workflow, or to configure process step settings.  
To access Workflow Builder from Workflow Job Manager  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select [Launch: Workflow  
Builder]. The Workflow Builder login displays.  
2. Log in to Workflow Builder.  
3. Select [File: New].  
4. Create a workflow.  
5. Save the workflow.  
6. Enable the workflow.  
7. Exit Workflow Builder.  
Accessing Workflow Submission Client from Workflow Job Manager  
If you need to create and/or submit a new job while in Job  
Manager, you can access Workflow Submission Client via the  
Jobs toolbar.  
To create and/or submit a new job  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, select [Workflow Submission  
Client] in the Jobs toolbar. The Workflow Submission Client  
login is displayed.  
2. Log in to Workflow Submission Client.  
3. Select a file for submission.  
4. Select a Workflow.  
5. Specify the job requirements.  
6. Select [Submit].  
7. Exit Workflow Submission Client.  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Workflow Job Manager  
Managing jobs from third party management information systems (MIS)  
Third party management information systems (MIS) can submit  
jobs directly to Process Manager. For incoming jobs that do not  
include all the necessary processing information, the operator  
might have to complete the job setup by assigning and configuring  
a workflow and/or selecting the workflow submission files.  
Incoming third party jobs that require additional configuration  
display the following elements:  
A paused job icon in the Name column  
“Attention Required” in the Status column  
Instructional text, for example: “Please configure this job and  
select Approve to begin processing.”  
The topics in the following sections cover the dialogs and  
procedures involved in configuring incoming third party MIS jobs:  
See also:  
4-38  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
Assigning and configuring a workflow for an incoming third  
party job  
On occasion, incoming jobs do not have the information  
necessary for processing, and you will need to assign a workflow.  
Choose a workflow...: This option allows you to select a workflow  
from the drop box.  
To assign and configure a workflow for an incoming  
third party job  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, from the Jobs list, select a job with  
“Attention Required” in the Status column.  
2. Choose a workflow from the Choose a workflow... drop box.  
NOTE: When you select a workflow, the JDF job intents are  
matched as closely as possible to the workflow settings. If the  
settings are locked or not available, the workflow defaults are  
applied.  
3. To configure process settings for the workflow, select a  
workflow step and select [Settings...].  
4. Make the desired changes and select [OK].  
5. Continue configuring the job if files have not been selected, or  
select [Approve] to release the job for processing.  
NOTE: [Approve] is available if a workflow has been assigned  
and files have been selected. If [Approve] is grayed out, you must  
complete the job configuration.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
Selecting files for an incoming third party job  
On occasion, incoming jobs do not have the information  
necessary for processing, and you will need to select files for a  
workflow.  
Select Files...: This option opens a common file dialog for  
selecting input files. If files have been selected, they are listed  
beneath the button instead of the default statement: “No files are  
currently associated with this job”.  
To select files for an incoming third party job  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, from the Jobs list, select a job with  
“Attention Required” in the Status column.  
2. Select [Select Files...].  
NOTE: If files have been selected previously, they are listed  
beneath the button.  
3. In the Open dialog, select the files to add to the job, and then  
select [Open].  
NOTE: The same file types that are supported in Workflow  
Submission Client are available.  
4. Continue configuring the job if a workflow has not been  
assigned, or select [Approve] to release the job for  
processing.  
NOTE: [Approve] is available if a workflow has been assigned  
and files have been selected. If [Approve] is grayed out, you must  
complete the job configuration.  
See also:  
4-40  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Workflow Job Manager  
Viewing the JDF file for an incoming third party job  
On occasion, incoming third party jobs do not have the information  
necessary for processing, and you will need to review the JDF file  
submitted with the job.  
View JDF: This option is available if a JDF file was submitted with  
the job. It opens the JDF file in a separate window.  
To view the JDF file for an incoming third party job  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, from the Jobs list, select a job with  
“Attention Required” in the Status column.  
2. Select [View JDF] to display the JDF file in a separate dialog.  
If desired, keep the window open while you configure the job in  
other dialogs, and then close the window.  
See also:  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Workflow Job Manager  
Viewing the job instructions for an incoming third party job  
On occasion, incoming third party jobs do not have the information  
necessary for processing, and you will need to review the job  
instructions submitted with the job.  
View Job Instructions: This option is available if a job  
instructions file was submitted with the job. It opens the file with  
Adobe Reader in a separate window.  
To view the job instructions for an incoming third party  
job  
1. In Workflow Job Manager, from the Jobs list, select a job with  
“Attention Required” in the Status column.  
2. Select [View Job Instructions] to display the job instructions  
in a separate dialog. If desired, keep the window open while  
you configure the job in other dialogs, and then close the  
window.  
See also:  
4-42  
FreeFlow Process Manager Operator and Administrator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Index  
A
P
About the FreeFlow Process Manager  
PDF files  
applications, 1-1  
Converting Adobe Illustrator and Adobe  
InDesign documents to PDF, 2-43  
Working with PDF Files, 2-43  
F
Preparing for workflow building and job  
FreeFlow Process Manager hardware and  
management, 1-9  
software configurations, 1-8  
Preps  
Setting up Preps, 1-20  
Preview pane  
H
Hot Folders  
Previewing job level edits, 2-82  
Printer  
About, 2-146  
Configuring the hot folder system settings,  
Not available on standalone client, 2-111  
Production printers  
Managing, 1-18  
Deleting a hot folder, 2-157  
Hot Folders, 2-153  
Managing  
R
Hot Folders Dialog, 2-152  
Pausing and resuming hot folder monitoring,  
Reprinting  
Saving a job ticket with the PDF for  
reprinting, 2-117  
Hot folders  
Reprinting with a hot folder, 2-117  
Reprinting with Workflow Submission  
Using Join, 2-146  
Client, 2-117  
Submit an RDO and produce an RDO using  
J
Workflow Submission Client, 3-19  
Job ticket file (xpf)  
Submitting to a hot folder for reprinting, 2-  
U
Using Document Library, 1-14  
L
W
Logging in to the FreeFlow Process Manager  
applications, 1-15  
Workflow Builder  
About Workflow Builder, 2-1  
M
Basic steps for building workflows, 2-22  
Building a new workflow, 2-23  
Checking the status of a process, 2-139  
Managing back-up and restore functions with  
Rescue, 1-14  
Change the offline or online status, 2-  
Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Administrator and Operator Guide  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Checking the status of a workflow, 2-145  
Moving or deleting an external process,  
Configuring workflow process settings, 2-33  
Creating preflight profiles, 2-187  
Deleting a workflow, 2-26  
Setting up external processes, 2-171  
Setting up folder-based profiles, 2-175  
Setting up third party input and output hot  
Disabling a workflow, 2-25  
Duplicating and modifying an existing  
folders, 2-169  
Workflow process icons, 2-13  
Workflow Job Manager  
workflow, 2-24  
Editing workflow properties, 2-26  
Enabling a workflow, 2-25  
Exporting workflows, 2-28  
Fail branches in workflows, 2-27  
Hot Folders  
About Workflow Job Manager, 4-1  
Accessing Workflow Builder from Workflow  
Job Manager, 4-37  
Accessing Workflow Submission Client from  
Workflow Job Manager, 4-37  
Submitting a job to a hot folder, 2-160  
Submitting a VPC file to a hot folder, 2-  
Approving a job at a Review step, 4-28  
Checking the status of a job, 4-14  
Deleting a job, 4-29  
Submitting an RDO to a hot folder, 2-  
Failing a job, 4-29  
Logging into Workflow Job Manager, 4-2  
Menus, 4-9  
Submitting xml workflows files to a hot  
folder, 2-164  
Error conditions for dynamic  
Modifying the copy count, 4-30  
Modifying workflow settings, 4-26  
Pausing a job, 4-27  
Toolbar, 4-13  
Viewing and editing a document in Adobe  
workflows, 2-165  
Importing workflows, 2-30  
Logging in to Workflow Builder, 2-2  
Main window components, 2-3  
Menus, 2-9  
Acrobat, 4-23  
Rules for building workflows, 2-22  
Setting the number of concurrent processes,  
Viewing job instructions for an incoming third  
party job, 4-42  
Viewing preflight results, 4-24  
Viewing print results, 4-25  
Setting the number of copy count divisor, 2-  
Viewing the JDF file for an incoming third  
Setting up a watermark in an email  
party job, 4-41  
attachment, 2-110  
Workflow Job Manager main window, 4-3  
Jobs area, 4-6  
Setting up repository credentials, 2-137  
Setting up the proxy server, 2-186  
Setting up the SMTP Server, 2-185  
Toolbars, 2-20  
Jobs area columns, 4-7  
Print Status descriptions, 4-8  
Status area, 4-4  
Using third party external processes, 2-167  
Adding or editing a CLI profile, 2-179  
Configuring parameters, 2-181  
Workflow process steps  
About Review, 2-106  
Configuring  
Adding or editing a folder-based profile,  
About Input, 2-34  
About Join, 2-44  
Adding bates numbers, 2-71  
Automatic Image Enhancement (AIE)  
settings, 2-35  
Barcode settings, 2-74  
Adding or editing an external process, 2-  
CLI Profile Setup dialog, 2-178  
Deleting an external process profile, 2-  
Configuring barcode data, 2-79  
Managing external processes, 2-170  
Index-2  
Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Administrator and Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Configuring barcode readable text,  
Job submission, 3-11  
Logging in to Workflow Submission Client, 3-  
Color Manage settings  
Ensuring Color Manage workflow  
consistency between the  
server and a remote client, 2-  
Main window components, 3-3  
Menus, 3-8  
Remote Workflow Submission Client, 3-20  
Submitting a file with saved job ticket  
information for reprinting, 3-17  
Submitting a job, 3-13  
Convert settings, 2-38  
Crop settings, 2-102  
External process settings, 2-136  
Imposition settings, 2-86  
About Job types, 2-96  
Submitting QuarkXPress files, 3-17  
Submitting RDOs, 3-19  
Submit an RDO and produce a PDF, 3-  
Job Level Edit settings  
Adding watermarks, 2-64  
Setting up text watermarks, 2-65  
Notify settings, 2-107  
E-mail attachments, 2-107  
Optimize settings, 2-45  
Submit an RDO and produce an RDO  
(reprint), 3-19  
Submitting VI Container jobs, 3-16  
Submitting Zip files, 3-16  
Workflow selection methods, 3-12  
Page numbering, 2-72  
Preflight settings, 2-60  
Z
Preps settings, 2-100  
Pressmarks settings, 2-103  
Print settings, 2-111  
Zoom In Zoom Out of Workflow View, 2-6  
Inserting separator pages, 2-113  
Rotate pages settings, 2-84  
Save settings, 2-115  
Configuring JDF Export settings, 2-119  
Creating conditional branches, 2-123  
Adding and configuring branch  
conditions, 2-126  
Conditions to add, 2-128  
Deleting conditional branches, 2-134  
Editing conditional branches, 2-133  
Guidelines for successful conditional  
branching, 2-124  
Linking conditional branches, 2-135  
Managing conditional branches, 2-131  
Legacy jworkflows  
Upgrading Job Level Edit nodes, 2-63  
Workflow Submission Client  
About submitting RDOs, 3-18  
Identifying the parts of an RDO, 3-18  
RDO limitations, 3-19  
About Workflow Submission Client, 3-1  
Accessing Workflow Builder from Workflow  
Submission Client, 3-20  
Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Administrator and Operator Guide  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Index-4  
Xerox FreeFlow Process Manager Administrator and Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Weed Eater Trimmer 530163512 User Manual
Wells Griddle WV 2HG User Manual
Westcott Camera Accessories 1893 User Manual
Whirlpool Refrigerator 4VET19DK User Manual
Whirlpool Refrigerator 2205958 User Manual
Whistler Marine Battery PRO 800W User Manual
Xbrand Fan XB 1002F User Manual
Xerox Fax Machine 877 User Manual
Yamaha Stereo Amplifier CP2000 User Manual
Zanussi Freezer ZEF 90 W User Manual